Home

Intel Server Platform AD450NX (ASDKCHSYS)

1. ED y 0 o lt Li y D O O O B o mi lo lo C o O o Oo fe fe D O T of ol O d e 1 Q Q Q Q OM06196 Figure 2 3 Power Supplies With Safety Interlocks Four Power Supplies fourth power supply is redundant AC power inlet receptacle and safety interlock mechanism Handle for removing the power supply Four screws PS LED green power supply okay When lit indicates the power supply is on and working When off it may indicate either that the power supply has failed the system loading on the power supply is too low to detect failure or the supply is not properly plugged in LED green power supply current OK When lit indicates power supply is on and OK When off indicates the power supply has shut down because of an overcurrent condition or the power supply has failed 39 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 6 Ifthe server does not come on when you plug the power cords into the power outlets press the power switch on the front panel 7 Verify that the power on light on the front panel is lit After a few seconds the power on self test POST begins See Power on Self Test on page 41 OM06772 Figure 2 4
2. OM06724 Figure 12 16 I O Baseboard Expansion Slots A 16 bit ISA slot B 32 bit PCI slots C 64 bit PCI slots NN M Be Figure 12 17 Expansion Slot Cover OM06725 163 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 164 10 11 Being careful not to touch the components or gold edge connectors on the add in board remove it from the protective wrapper and place it component side up on a nonconductive antistatic surface Record the serial number of the board in your equipment log Set any jumpers or switches according to the board manufacturer s instructions Grasp the board by the top edge or upper corners and firmly press it into an expansion slot on the I O baseboard Figures 12 18 The tapered foot of the board retaining bracket must fit into the mating slot in the expansion slot frame Reinstall the retaining bracket for add in boards as described earlier Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 If you installed an ISA add in board run the SSU to reconfigure the server Running the SSU is optional for a PCI add in board For information about running this utility see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run UL LI
3. OM06194 Figure 1 6 Top and Side Covers Security Padlock 28 Chapter 1 Introduction to the High performance Server Alarm Switches The server has three alarm switches to prevent unauthorized entry into the server A switch on the front panel board monitors the top cover Two switches on the hot docking backplane monitor the the doors to the hot docking bays 29 oo N N to o gt O QN lt KS 2 5 55 bi 5 3 5 8 WV oO O IOOOOO0O0O0O0O0O0 DCH ye gt IOOOOOO000o0ot OCH E e os a he c29 IOOOOO00000o DOC O D a JOOOOOOOoooot OCH lt Kei sx O n OD IOOOOO0O0O0O0O0O0 DOC N p o lo IOOOOOOooooo DOC D o Tw gt O oO oO lt O C oct 3 eo E D FIA AANA MNN N i A B C AD450NX Server System Product Guide Password Protection BIOS passwords prevent unauthorized tampering with the server If you set the user password but not the administrative password the BIOS requires you to enter the user password before you can boot the server or run the
4. OM06760 Figure 17 2 CPU Baseboard Layout Processor slot 4 Processor slot 3 Processor slot 2 Processor slot 1 Expander bus connector J19 Memory module 2 connector primary J18 Memory module 1 connector secondary or memory terminator module J31 Jumper block J1 VRM connector provides power for processor slot 1 processor core power only J2 VRM connector provides power for processor slots 1 and 2 L2 cache power only J3 VRM connector provides power for processor slot 2 processor core power only J4 VRM connector provides power for processor slot 3 processor core power only J5 VRM connector provides power for processor slots 3 and 4 L2 cache power only J6 VRM connector provides power for processor slot 4 processor core power only Chapter 17 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers CPU Baseboard Connectors Memory Connectors J18 and J19 Signal Power and Ground Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin GND A01 MD_L 36 B01 GND CO 1 5V A02 3 3V B02 DSTBN_L 2 C02 GND A03 MD_L 39 B03 GND C03 MD_L 41 A04 3 3V B04 DSTBP_L 2 C04 GND A05 MD_L 43 B05 GND C05 MD_L 45 A06 3 3V B06 MD_L 46 C06 GND A07 MD_L 48 B07 GND C07 MD_L 50 A08 3 3V B08 MD_L 51 C08 GND A09 MD_L 53 Bog GND cog DCMPLT A B _L A10 3 3V B10 MD_L 54 C10 GND A11 GND B11 1 5V C11 MUXCLK1 A B A12 GND B12 MD_L 56 C12 GND A13 GND B13 1 5V C13 MD
5. Board Information Area Version 1 Length 64 Unicode Country Base 00h Manufacturing Time mins 733803 Manufacturer Name ASCII Intel Product Name ASCII AD450NX Server System Serial Number ASCII 0123456789 Part Number ASCII 664653 001 END OF FIELDS CODE 107 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Product Information Area Version 1 Length 80 Unicode Country Base 00h Manufacturer Name ASCII Intel Product Name ASCII AD450NX Server System Part Number ASCII ASDK128M1P2MBPP Version ASCII Serial Number ASCII 0123456789 Asset Tag ASCII END OF FIELDS CODE Displaying SDR Area 108 The SDR nonvolatile storage area is displayed in the following hex format The data is separated by a Sensor Record Number X header where X is the number of that sensor record in the SDR area The next line after the header is the sensor record data in hex format delineated by spaces Each line holds up to 16 bytes The data on each line is followed by the same data in ASCII format nonprintable characters are substituted by a period Example To display the SDR area type frusdr d sdr and press lt Enter gt A message similar to the following appears Reading SDR Record 1 OE 00 10 01 37 20 00 OF 05 00 10 F1 F8 02 01 85 ale O 02 00 00 00 04 00 00 C4 02 00 08 30 C2 07 91 95 LL ooo oo ES SE FE 00 TB IB 0 0 99 95 00 8A78E 02 02 00 01 CC
6. OM06726 Figure 12 18 Installing an Add in Board A 16 bit ISA slot ISA board component side up B 32 bit PCI slot PCI board component side down C 64 bit PCI slot PCI board component side down Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling Removing an Add in Board CAUTION Expansion slot covers must be installed on all vacant slots to maintain the electromagnetic emission characteristics of the server and to ensure proper cooling of the server components See Figures 12 16 12 17 and 12 18 1 2 10 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Disconnect any cables attached to the board you are removing Remove the retaining bracket for add in boards as described earlier Grasp the board by the top edge or upper corners and carefully pull it toward you until the edge connector of the board pulls free from the connector on the I O baseboard Make sure that you do not scrape the board against other components Store the board in an antistatic protective wrapper Install an expansion slot cover Figure 12 17 over the vacant slot The tapered foot of the cover must fit into the mating slot in the bottom of the expansion slot frame Reinstall the retaining bracket for the add in boards as described earlier Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 If you re
7. system setup utitity TA EEE File Pr ES Security All security options require that a password be set for the system Admin Password User Password Options System Setup Utility Figure 5 7 Password Main Window 77 AD450NX Server System Product Guide System Event Log Manager Add in 78 Clicking on the SEL Manger add in task brings up the SEL Manager window It lets you examine SEL records e via the Baseboard Management Controller BMC in hex or verbose mode e by sensor type or event type in hex or verbose mode e from a previously stored binary file in hex or verbose mode The SEL Manager window also lets you e save the SEL records to a file in either text or binary form e clear the SEL entries from the nonvolatile storage area SEL Manager Menus Click on File Load SEL Save SEL Clear SEL Exit View SEL Info All Events By Sensor By Event View Realtime Settings Display HEX Display Verbose Output Binary Output Text Help About to view data from a previously saved SEL file save the currently loaded SEL data to a file clear the SEL data from the BMC quit the SEL Viewer display information about the SEL these fields are display only display the current SEL data from the BMC bring up a pop up menu that allows you to load only the data from a certain sensor type bring up a pop up menu that allows you to load only the data from a certain event type toggle between the Hex
8. D OM07153 Figure 9 1 Hard Disk Drive and Carrier A B C D EMI ESD grounding clips and fingers SCA connector SCSI hard disk drive Drive carrier handle OM08268 Figure 9 2 Hard Disk Drive and Carrier Assembly A Four screws 113 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Installing a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive in a Hot docking Bay See Figures 9 3 and 9 4 1 Insert the key in the front bezel lock and turn it to position C to unlock the doors Open the lower front doors of the server 2 Orient the carrier and drive assembly in front of the hot docking bay guide rails so that metal fingers of the perforated metal bracket attached to the carrier are facing to your right Make sure that the carrier is placed correctly into the guide rails to avoid damage 3 While grasping only the drive carrier handle firmly push the assembly into the bay until the drive docks with the hot docking backplane connector CAUTION Do not press on the perforated metal bracket of the carrier when you push the assembly into the bay Otherwise you may damage the metal fingers of A OM06744 Figure 9 3 Installing a Hard Disk Drive A Drive carrier latch B Drive carrier handle C _Hot docking bay guide rails 114 Chapter 9 Hot swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives Installing Hot Swapping gu DD OM06198 Figure 9 4 Front Bezel Security Ke
9. Dump to File Help Figure 5 5 System Resource Usage Window 73 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Multiboot Add in The Multiboot Add in MBA provides an interface for selecting Initial Program Load IPL devices Using the MBA you can identify all IPL devices in the system and prioritize their boot order On power up the BIOS sequentially attempts to boot from each device To change the boot device priority 1 Click on the device to select it 2 Click on the Move Up button to move the device up 3 Click on Move Down button to move the device down 4 Click on the Save button to save the boot order in the system nonvolatile storage 74 Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run EI ste setup utitity File Multiboot Options Add in BE GE Boot Device Priority Removable Devices Hard Drive ATAPI CD ROM Drive Hard Drives Bootable Add in amp Move Down WE BEE Figure 5 6 Multiboot Main Window 75 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Security Add in The Security Add in PWA provides security and password support options Within the PWA you can either set or modify the User and Administrator passwords or update any of the various security options available To Set the User Password 1 Click on the user password button 2 Enter the password in the first field 3 Verify the password by entering it again in the second field To Change or Clear the User Password 1 Click
10. 277 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Power Supply Input Voltages Table 20 1 Power Supply AC Input Ratings Parameter Minimum Nominal Maximum Units V in 115 90 100 120 132 V RMS V in 230 180 200 240 264 V RMS V in Frequency 47 50 60 63 Hz AC Input Current 7 0 A 110 VAC Ampere 3 4 A 210 VAC The 420 watt autoranging power supplies are capable of handling up to 12 hard drives at 24 watts per drive typical 3 5 inch by 1 6 inch 7200 RPM drive and four processors at a maximum of 50 watts per processor However the power distribution systems cables boards and connectors are sized to handle up to 12 hard drives at 28 watts per drive and four processors at a maximum of 65 watts per processor The CPU baseboard provides headers for six VRM 8 3 compatible voltage converters The converter input is 12 V from the power supply Each processor core has its own converter One converter is provided for a pair of processor caches The maximum processor power of 65 watts is based on a ratio of 2 1 core to cache power The converters can handle a maximum of 50 watts per processor The total power requirement for the board set exceeds the 240 VA energy hazard limit that defines an operator accessible area The 240 VA protection circuits for the hot docking bay area protect the user from a 240 VA energy hazard while installing or removing hot swapping a hard disk drive Power Supply Output Voltages 278 Table 20 2 Power
11. Figure 15 2 SCSI 68 pin Connector SCSI Bus Pin Ni gw o 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 SCSI Bus Pin 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 Connector Input Pin 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 Signal DB 12 L DB 13 L DB 14 L DB 15_L DBP1_L DBO_L DB1_L DB2 L DB3_L D A L DB5_L DB6_L DB7_L DBP_L Ground Ground Reserved Reserved Reserved Ground ATN_L Ground BSY_L ACK_L RST_L continued Chapter 15 SCSI Hot docking Backplane Description SCSI IDs Wide Fast SCSI Input16 Bit Connectors J1 amp J2 continued Signal Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Connector Input Pin 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 SCSI Bus Pin 51 53 55 57 59 61 63 65 67 SCSI Bus Pin 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 Connector Input Pin 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 Signal MSG_L SEL_L C D_L REQ_L VO_L DB8L DB9 L DB 10_L DB 11_L 199 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Wide Fast SCSI 16 Bit SCA Type Connectors J10 J15 amp J20 J25 OM06755 Figure 15 3 SCSI SCA 80 pin Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 12 V Charge 41 12 V Ground 2 12 V 42 12 V Ground 3 12 V 43 12 V Ground 4 12 V 44 Mated 1 5 Reserved ESI 1 45 EFW_L 6 Reserved ESI 2 46 DIFFSNS
12. Is AC power available at the wall outlets Are the server power cords properly connected to the power supplies and the wall outlets If present are the fuses in the server power cord plugs okay Did you press the power on off push button switch Is the power on light lit Have any of the fan motors stopped use the server management subsystem to check the fan status Are the fan power cables properly connected to the SCSI hot docking backplane Is the cable from the front panel board connected to the I O baseboard Are all power and signal cables properly connected to the power distribution backplane Are the power distribution backplane power and signal cables properly connected to the SCSI hot docking backplane Are there any shorted wires caused by pinched cables or power connector plugs forced into power connector sockets the wrong way If switches and connections are correct and AC power is available at the wall outlets contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance Chapter 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages No Characters Appear on Screen Check the following Is the keyboard working Is the video monitor plugged in and turned on a a Q Are the brightness and contrast controls on the video monitor properly adjusted O Are the switch settings on the video monitor correct a Is the video monitor signal cable properly installed If you are using an add in video controller boar
13. Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the snap on drive bay cover as described in Chapter 11 Grasp the frame of the snap on cover with one hand and grasp the twist out filler panel with your other hand Using a twisting motion break the tabs that secure the filler panel to the cover Set the cover and filler panel aside Insert the blade of a small screwdriver through one of the access holes in the EMI shield and pry the shield out of the bay As an alternate method reach through the back of the 5 25 inch bay and push the shield out Save the shield Remove the device from the protective packaging and place it on an antistatic surface Record in your equipment log the model and serial numbers of the device Set any jumpers and switches according to the device manufacturer s instructions If you are installing a SCSI CD ROM drive or other SCSI device each SCSI device must have a unique SCSI ID For example the default address for a SCSI CD ROM drive is ID 5 If necessary use the configuration jumpers on the back of the device to change the ID For reference record the SCSI ID of the drive in your equipment log Chapter 13 Boot Drives and Removable Media Drives Installing Removing Replacing OM08272 Figure 13 2 Drive Bay Filler Panels OM
14. When pressed it causes a nonmaskable interrupt This switch is recessed behind the front panel to prevent inadvertent activation It must be pressed with a narrow tool not supplied When lit continuously it indicates the presence of DC power in the server It goes out when the power is turned off or the power source is disrupted When lit continuously it indicates a power supply failure When flashing it indicates a 240 VA overload shutdown and power control failures When flashing it indicates a fan failure has been detected in the server When lit continuously it indicates an asserted fault status on one or more hard disk drives in the hot docking bay When flashing it indicates drive reset in progress When pressed it turns on or off the DC power inside the server When pressed it resets the server and causes the power on self test POST to run It provides a connection for headphones or speakers It adjusts the volume of headphones or speakers When lit it indicates the drive is in use When pressed it opens or closes the CD tray It secures the front doors of the bezel When lit it indicates the drive is in use When pressed it ejects the diskette When lit continuously it indicates the presence of the drive and power on the drive When flashing it indicates drive activity M Two position lock 3 5 inch Diskette Drive N Activity LED O Ejector button Status LEDs for SCSI Drives in Hot docking
15. 3 3 V DEVSEL_L GND LOCK_L PERR_L 3 3 V SERR_L 3 3 V C BE1_L AD14 GND AD12 AD10 GND KEY KEY AD8 AD7 3 3 V AD5 AD3 GND AD1 5 V ACK64_L 5 V 5 V Chapter 16 I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers 64 bit PCI Connector For pins Al A62 and B1 B62 the 64 bit PCI connector is identical to the 32 bit PCI connector The table below shows the additional extension pins for the 64 bit PCI connector Pin A63 A64 A65 A66 A67 A68 A69 A70 A71 A72 A73 A74 A75 A76 A77 A78 A79 A80 A81 A82 A83 A84 A85 A86 A87 A88 A89 A90 A91 A92 A93 A94 Signal GND Ground C BE7_L C BE5_L 5 V PAR64 AD62 GND AD60 AD58 GND AD56 AD54 5 V AD52 AD50 GND AD48 AD46 GND AD44 AD42 5 V AD40 AD38 GND AD36 AD34 GND AD32 RESERVED GND RESERVED Pin B63 B64 B65 B66 B67 B68 B69 B70 B71 B72 B73 B74 B75 B76 B77 B78 B79 B80 B81 B82 B83 B84 B85 B86 B87 B88 B89 B90 B91 B92 B93 B94 Signal RESERVED GND C BE6_L C BE4_L GND AD63 AD61 5 V AD59 AD57 GND AD55 AD53 GND AD51 AD49 5 V AD47 AD45 GND AD43 AD41 5 V AD39 AD37 5 V AD35 AD33 GND RESERVED RESERVED GND 227 AD450NX Server System Product Guide ISA Connector The ISA connector on the I O baseboard follows the standard pinout given in the ISA Specification Pin Signal Pin Signal B1 GND Ground A1 IOCHK_L B2 RESET A2 SD7 B3 5 V A3 SD6 B4 IRQ9 A4 SD5 B5 5
16. 5 System Setup Utility When to Run The System Setup Utility SSU is on the Server System Configuration Software CD shipped with the server The SSU provides a graphical user interface GUD over an extensible framework for server configuration For the AD450NX systems the SSU framework supports the following functions and capabilities e assigns resources to baseboard devices and add in cards prior to loading the operating system OS e allows you to specify boot device order and system security options e permits viewing and clearing of the system s critical event log e allows troubleshooting of the server when the OS is not operational e provides a system level view of the server s I O devices When to Run the System Setup Utility The SSU is a DOS based utility that supports extended system configuration operations for onboard resources and add in boards The utility also allows you to view the system event log SEL and to set system boot and security options Use the SSU when you need to e add and remove boards affecting the assignment of resources ports memory IRQs DMA e modify the server s boot device order or security settings e change the server configuration settings e save and restore the server configuration e view or clear the SEL If you install or remove an ISA add in board you must run the SSU to reconfigure the server Running the SSU is optional for a PCI and ISA Plug and Play add in boards The SSU is PCI a
17. 7 DB 11_L 47 Ground 8 DB 10_L 48 Ground 9 DB9 L 49 Ground 10 DB8_L 50 Ground 11 VO_L 51 Ground 12 REQ_L 52 Ground 13 C D_L 53 Ground 14 SEL_L 54 Ground 15 MSG_L 55 Ground 16 RST_L 56 Ground 17 ACK_L 57 Ground 18 BSY_L 58 Ground 19 ATN_L 59 Ground 20 DB P_L 60 Ground 21 DB 7_L 61 Ground 22 DB 6_L 62 Ground 23 DB5_L 63 Ground 24 DB4 L 64 Ground 25 DB3_L 65 Ground 26 DB2L 66 Ground 27 DB1_L 67 Ground 28 DBO_L 68 Ground 29 DB P1_L 69 Ground continued 200 Chapter 15 SCSI Hot docking Backplane Description SCSI IDs Wide Fast SCSI 16 Bit SCA Type Connectors J10 J15 amp J20 J25 continued Pin 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Signal DB 15 L DB 14_L DB 13_L DB 12_L 5 V 5 V 5 V Charge Spindle Sync MTRON SCSI ID 0 SCSI ID 2 Hot swap Control Connector Pin ON Oa FW M 4 OI NO oO P Go Mi O Signal Ground Ground SCL Ground Key Ground SDA Ground Not used Ground PWR_GOOD Ground Interlock Ground RST_I2C_L Ground Interlock_IN Pin 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 Pin 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Signal Ground Ground Ground Ground Mated 2 5V Ground 5V Ground Active LED Out DLYD_START SCSI ID 1 SCSI ID 3 Signal Ground Intrusion_L Ground Fan_12V_10V_L Ground Intrusion_IN Ground HSBP_PGM_MODE Ground HSBP_PGM_ENABLE Ground HSBP_PGM_SCLK Ground
18. Comment Enabled lets the host adapter generate a SCSI bus reset the first time the host adapter is initialized Enabled lets the server boot from a SCSI hard drive connected to the host adapter When enabled the AIC 7880 BIOS reserves 32 KB of BIOS space No effect if the BIOS is disabled however 2 KB of memory space is still reserved per PCI and Plug and Play specifications These options let you control which removable media drives the host adapter BIOS supports No effect if the BIOS is disabled A CAUTION Do not remove media from a removable media drive if it is under BIOS control Boot Only Only a removable media drive designated as the boot device is treated as a fixed hard disk drive All Disks All removable media drives supported by the AIC 7880 BIOS are treated as fixed drives If you area NetWare user all removable media drives are automatically supported by NetWare as fixed disks regardless of how you set this option Disabled No removable media drives running under DOS are treated as fixed drives Device driver software is needed because the drives are not controlled by the adapter BIOS Enabled allows SCSI hard disk drives greater than 1 GB to use a translation scheme of 255 heads 63 sectors per track This extends the disk drive capacity limit under DOS to 8 GB No effect if the BIOS is disabled When enabled at boot time a prompt displays to let you run the SCSISelect program No effect if the
19. tata 81 Main Menu for AI dada 82 Configuration Men sor neeaae uns 82 Boot Device Configuration Men 83 SCSI Device Configuration Men ENEE 83 Advanced Configuration Opli ns nase ae 84 SCSI Disk Utilities Menu nn 85 Exit Men elek ae neun 85 Main Menu for AHA 3940AUW een 86 CONnNGUFALION RE een ee ae ae 87 Boot Device Configuration Men 87 SCSI Device Configuration Men ENEE 88 Contents Advanced Configuration Options EE 89 SCSI Disk Utilities Menu nenn 90 Exit Menu nee nee a A AEE EEEa 90 7 Emergency Management Port Console How to Use How EMP Console Works ee 92 Bt EE EE 94 Setting Up the Server for the EMP oasis 94 server MEH scores cs riscos 95 Console Redirection Submenu ue 95 Main EMP Console WindoW cc naar ee kei 95 TOO BA en ee a en a se A Paar te ach Rea AM 96 Status Barnes eek u Eu 96 EMP ge le RE EE 96 Server Control Operations eran anne li 97 COMES imac 97 Power ON DIE Eures een 98 Rese a a SE dE 99 A e EE 100 RAW WIGWOl cats ten a eee ade 101 FRU Viewer Menu Options een 101 8 FRU and SDR Load Utility When to Run When to Run the FRUSDR Load Utility ae EEN SEN 103 What You Need to DO ren ee Re RGus tani eA Rare He ee Gees aes 103 How You Use the FRUSDR Load UN Wa ee 104 Command Line Format issan e ee 104 Parsing the Command Line ee 104 Displaying Usage Information sica ee Ba aceon 104 Displaying a Given Area AEN 106 Displaying RTR CT ee re 106 Displaying FRU Aled sn ne ee ee 106
20. 12V 12V Signal 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 18 Memory and Memory Terminator Modules Description Adding Memory This chapter describes the memory and memory terminator modules and tells how to populate the DIMM sockets on the module Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 125 Module Features Memory module e Up to 4 GB of ECC memory using sixteen 72 bit dual inline memory modules DIMMs e 60ns and 50 ns 3 3 V buffered EDO DRAM e Four way interleaving e A minimum configuration of 128 MB using four 32 MB DIMMs e Supports buffered DIMMs with capacities of 32 64 and 256 MB e Provides server management data with an onboard EEPROM including thermal monitoring FRU information and presence detect bit access e Can act as a memory terminator module when not populated with DIMMs Memory terminator module e Used as an alternate means to properly terminate the memory bus other than with an empty memory module e Installs into the secondary memory connector on the CPU baseboard when only one memory module is installed e Provides server management data with an onboard EEPROM including thermal monitoring FRU information and presence detect bit access You must install two high capacity DRAM memory modules in the memory connectors on the C
21. 8 Reinstall the air baffle as described earlier 9 Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 144 Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling OM06715 Figure 12 5 Memory Module A Memory module DIMM side up D Slot guides B Eject insert levers E CPU baseboard CG DIMMs Removing Installing a Memory Terminator Module If only one memory module is installed on the CPU baseboard a memory terminator module must be installed in the other memory connector to properly terminate the bus To install a terminator module follow the above procedures for removing reinstalling a memory module OM08359 Figure 12 6 Terminator Module A Terminator module component side down C Slot guides B Eject insert levers D CPU baseboard 145 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Front Side Bus Terminator Module The CPU baseboard provides four slot 2 connectors for processors packaged in S E C cartridges If any slot 2 connector is depopulated a terminator module must be installed in the connector to properly terminate the signals on the front side bus FSB For example if only two slots are populated with processors you need FSB terminator modules in the two unpopulated processor slots The terminator modules are housed in plastic covers Removing a Terminator Module See Figure 12 7 1 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines 2 Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapt
22. B34 B35 B36 B37 B38 B39 B40 B41 B42 B43 B44 B45 B46 B47 B48 Signal X0D_L 11 XOBE_L 1 XOXSTBN_L GND ISP_HSBP_SDO GND RSVD GND RSVD GND INTERLOCK_L RSVD GND RSVD GND RSVD GND X1HRTS_L GND X1BE_L 0 GND X1PAR_L GND X1ADS_L X1D_L 11 X1BE_L 1 X1XSTBN_L GND RSVD GND Pin C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 C37 C38 C39 C40 C41 C42 C43 C44 C45 C46 C47 C48 273 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 274 Interconnect to I O Baseboard Signal Section D amp E Signal RSVD RSVD IO_TRST_L PICD 0 INIT_3V_L GND BMC_SPI_BUS 2 GND XOIB_L IO_PWRGD 12C_GLOBAL_SCL GND RESET_HSBP_L GND RSVD GND RSVD GND RSVD GND XOXSTBP_L GND XOHSTBP_L XOHSTBN_L ISP_MODE RSVD RSVD 12V ISP_EN2_L GND RSVD RSVD X1IB_L PS_PWR_ON RSVD GND RSVD GND Pin D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 Signal PIC_CLK GND PICD 1 GND RESET_PWR_DIST_L GND BMC_SPI_BUS 4 GND CIB_INT 0 GND INTR_3V GND FERR_L GND XOBLK_L GND XORST_L GND RSVD GND RSVD GND GND GND ISP_EN_L GND 12V GND CPU_SLP_L GND RSVD GND PWR_GOOD GND RSVD GND VREF GND Pin El E2 ES E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 E15 E16 E17 E18 E19 E20 E21 E2
23. B55 B56 B57 B58 B59 B60 Signal MA_L 10 GND MEM A B _TMS 1 5V MEM A B _TDI 1 5V MD_L 1 GND DSTBN_L 0 GND DSTBP_L 0 GND MD_L 14 GND DSEL 0 1 _L 1 5V MD_L 18 1 5V MD_L 22 GND DSTBP_L 1 GND DSTBN_L 1 GND MD_L 34 Memory Connectors J18 and J19 Signal Power and Ground D amp E Signal MD_L 37 GND MD_L 40 GND MD_L 44 GND MD_L 49 GND WDEVT_L GND MD_L 55 Pin D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10 D11 Signal 3 3V MD_L 38 3 3V MD_L 42 3 3V MD_L 47 3 3V MD_L 52 3 3V DVALID A B _L 3 3V Pin E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E06 E07 E08 E09 E10 E11 Pin C36 C37 C38 C39 C40 C41 C42 C43 C44 C45 C46 C47 C48 C49 C50 C51 C52 C53 C54 C55 C56 C57 C58 C59 C60 continued Chapter 17 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Memory Connectors J18 and J19 Signal Power and Ground D amp E continued Signal Pin Signal Pin GND D12 MD_L 57 E12 MD_L 58 D13 3 3V E13 GND D14 MD_L 60 E14 MD_L 62 D15 3 3V E15 GND D16 MD_L 64 E16 MD_L 66 D17 3 3V E17 GND D18 MD_L 68 E18 MD_L 70 D19 3 3V E19 GND D20 3 3V E20 NC D21 3 3V E21 GND D22 12C_BMC_SCL E22 PWRGDB D23 3 3V E23 GND D24 12C_BMC_SDA E24 RHIT A B _L D25 3 3V E25 GND D26 3 3V E26 GRCMPLT_L D27 3 3V E27 GND D28 BANK1_L E28 CMND1_L D29 3 3V E29 GND D30 CSTB_L E30 MA_L 0 D31 3 3V E31 GND D32 MA_L 2 E32 MA_L 3 D33 3 3V E33 GND D34 MA_L 6 E34 MA
24. CPU 1 0177 Previous CPU Failure CPU 2 0178 Previous CPU Failure CPU 3 0179 Previous CPU Failure CPU 4 0180 Attempting to boot with failed CPU 0181 BSP switched system may be in uniprocessor mode 0191 CMOS battery failed 0195 CMOS system options not set 0198 CMOS checksum invalid 0289 System memory size mismatch 0295 Address line short detected 0297 Memory size decreased 0299 ECC Error Correction failure 0370 Keyboard controller error 0373 Keyboard stuck key detected 0375 Keyboard and mouse swapped 0430 Timer Channel 2 failure 0440 Gate A20 failure 0441 Unexpected interrupt in protected mode 0445 Master interrupt controller error 0446 Slave interrupt controller error 0450 Master DMA controller error 0451 Slave DMA controller error 0452 DMA controller error 0460 Fail safe timer NMI failure 0461 Software port NMI failure 0465 Bus time out NMI in slot 0467 Expansion board NMI in slot 0510 PCI parity error 0710 Baseboard device resource conflict 0711 Static device resource conflict 0780 PCI Segment 1 memory request exceeds 998 MB 0781 PCI Segment 1 I O requests exceeds 12K 0782 PCI I O request exceeds amount available 0783 PCI memory request exceeds amount available 0784 Illegal bus for memory request below 1 MB 0785 Memory request below 1 MB exceeds 1 MB 0800 PCI I O port conflict 0801 PCI memory conflict continued 300 Chapter 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages POST E
25. Description Running POWer 0n Sal Tostadas dente acia 47 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 4 Setup Utility When to Run Whento Bun itheBlO8SelupUlliiyarasssessssite net a 49 Running the Setup llity u ee drid 49 Main Menica 2 23 errechnen az 51 Zlvapnceekent ed ees en ne 53 Security Menu ek 57 Server Me Usada ee ne a ee TA A 58 leien i VE EENG 60 Exit Menu Selections cccooccccnccccnnccncnnncnnnnancnnncnnnnoncnnncnn nano nono a a a cnn nc nn a a 61 5 System Setup Utility When to Run When to Run the System Setup Utility coooooocccccnnnnnancccconononononancnonononnnnnrnnnnnonannnns 63 What You Need to D ner 64 R nno Mes SU cai dd ed 64 AM A e 65 Customizing the SSU u ee picas 66 Eatinehing adas ads ctrl iii 66 Resource Configuration Add in RCA Wimdow 68 DefininganISsA Gardasee ee 70 Adding and Removing ISA Cards 71 Modifying Resources une ehe 72 System Resource Us unen aora en 73 Multiboot Add ira dianas Gee 74 security AI A ene 76 To Set the User Password asnicar ida 76 To Change or Clear the User Password 76 To Set the Administrator Password ceci di 76 To Change or Clear the Administrator Password 76 security OPIONS An ae ne 76 System Event Log Manager Add in ENEE 78 A A ee 79 6 SCSISelect Utility When to Run When to Run the SCSISelect Utility o oooooooocccccnnnnnnccononcccncncnnnnanncnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 81 Running the SG Ss Select
26. GND GND GND 13 SLCT select XICMB Connectors The XICMB device provides external access to the ICMB devices that are within the chassis This makes it possible to externally access chassis management functions alert logs post mortem data etc The device also provides a mechanism for chassis power control The server provides two SEMCONN 6 pin connectors to allow daisy chained cabling OM06193A Pin Signal No connection No connection positive negative No connection oa kw Dn No connection 235 AD450NX Server System Product Guide VGA Video Port 236 Pin oa kw Mi 10 11 12 13 14 15 OM00936A Signal Red analog color signal R Green analog color signal G Blue analog color signal B No connection GND video ground shield GND video ground shield No connection GND video ground No connection HSYNC horizontal sync VSYNC vertical sync No connection 17 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers This chapter describes the CPU baseboard and tells how to use the jumpers Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 125 CPU Baseboard Features The CPU baseboard interfaces with the I O baseboard through the interconnect backplane The CPU baseboard provides four slot 2 type
27. Manufacturer Name Intel Name AD450NX Server System Version Number ASDK128M1P2MBPP Serial Number 0123456789 Loading DMI Board Area Manufacturing Name Intel Name AD450NX Server System Serial Number 0123456789 Version Number 661880 303 Loading DMI Chassis Area Chassis Part Number 693792 003 Chassis Serial Number 200418630 Asset Tag If a failure occurs the utility displays an error message and exits Cleaning Up and Exiting If an update was successfully performed the utility displays a single message and then exits If the utility fails it immediately exits with an error message and exit code 110 9 Hot swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives Installing Hot Swapping Hot docking Bays Twelve 3 5 inch hot docking bays provide space for 3 5 inch wide by either 1 or 1 6 inch high single connector attachment SCA SCSI hard disk drives The WideUltra SCSI hot docking backplane provides industry standard 80 pin SCA 2 connectors arranged in two rows each row is on a separate SCSI channel You can install up to 12 industry standard wide fast 20 SCSI HI SCA type hard disk drives in these bays They accept drives that consume up to 24 watts of power and run at a maximum ambient temperature of 50 C 112 F When the bays are fully configured with 9 GB drives they provide up to 108 GB of data storage The lower plastic doors on the front bezel conceal the hot docking bays The doors provide airflow and ea
28. Remove the memory module as described in Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling Being careful not to touch the components on the memory module place the module DIMM side up on a nonconductive static free surface Chapter 18 Memory and Memory Terminator Modules Description Adding Memory 5 Holdthe DIMM only by the edges as you remove the DIMM from the antistatic package 6 Beginning with bank A Figure 18 6 socket J1 orient the DIMM so that the two notches in the bottom edge align with the keyed socket OM06766 Figure 18 6 DIMM Orientation Bank A J1 J4 Bank B J5 J8 Bank C J9 J12 Bank D J13 J16 DO D PS 257 AD450NX Server System Product Guide CAUTION Use extreme care when installing a DIMM Applying too much pressure can damage the socket slot DIMMs are keyed such that they can be inserted in only one way 7 Insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into socket J1 and press down firmly on the DIMM until it seats correctly Figure 18 7 OM06767 Figure 18 7 Properly Seated DIMM 8 Repeat the above steps to install more DIMMs Always install them in sequence by installing the next DIMM in bank A socket J2 and so on with the last one in bank D so
29. Stepping ID 2 L2 cache size 512 KB Stepping ID absent or disabled continued Main Menu continued Feature Processor 3 Processor 4 Keyboard Features Numlock Key Click Keyboard auto repeat rate Keyboard auto repeat delay Language Advanced Menu Option Auto On Off Disabled Enabled 30 sec 26 7 sec 21 8 sec 18 5 sec 13 3 sec 10 sec 6 sec 2 sec 1 4 sec 1 2 sec 3 4 sec 1 sec English US Frangais Deutsch Italiano Espanol Chapter 4 Setup Utility When to Run Description Stepping ID absent or disabled Stepping ID absent or disabled Press lt Enter gt for options Select power on state for numlock Enabled produces the key click Select key repeat rate Select delay before key repeat Select the display language for the BIOS Setup Warning Setting items on this menu to incorrect values may cause your system to malfunction Feature Plug amp Play O S Reset Configuration Data Enable ACPI Use Multiprocessor Specification Large Disk Access Mode Option No Yes No Yes No Yes 1 1 1 4 CHS LBA Description Select Yes if you are using a Plug and Play capable operating system Select No if you need the BIOS to configure nonboot devices Select Yes if you want to clear the system configuration data Select Yes if you want to enable the advanced configuration and power interface ACPI BIOS Configure the Multiprocessor Spec
30. X1D_L 13 GND X1D_L 10 GND X1D_L 7 GND X1D_L 5 GND X1D_L 2 GND X1XRTS_L GND 12C_DS2P_SDA GND RSVD GND RSVD GND RSVD GND ISP_SCLK GND XOCLKB GND X0D_L 13 GND X0D_L 10 GND X0D_L 7 GND XOD_L 5 GND X0D_L 2 GND XOXRTS_L Pin B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32 B33 B34 B35 B36 B37 B38 Signal GND RSVD GND X1XSTBN_L X1BE_L 1 X1D_L 11 X1ADS_L GND X1PAR_L GND X1BE_L 0 GND X1HRTS_L GND 12C_DS2P_SCL GND RSVD GND RSVD RSVD GND RSVD GND RSVD GND RSVD GND XOXSTBN_L XOBE_L 1 XOD_L 11 XOADS_L GND XOPAR_L GND XOBE_L 0 GND XOHRTS_L GND Pin C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 C37 C38 continued 247 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Expander Bus Connector Signal Section A B amp C continued Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin GND A39 GND B39 I2C_GLOBAL_SDA C39 NMI_5V A40 IGNNE_5V_L B40 SMI_3V_L C40 12C_BMC_SDA A41 GND B41 BMC_SPI_BUS 5 C41 12C_BMC_SCL A42 BMC_SPI_BUS 3 B42 GND C42 BMC_SPI_BUS 0 A43 GND B43 PROC_RESET_L C43 BMC_SPI_BUS 6 A44 CPU_SPI_RESET_L B44 A20M_3V_L C44 BMC_SPI_BUS 1 A45 GND B45 PWRGDB C45 IO_TDO A46 IO_TDI B46 IO_TMS C46 IO_TCK A47 GND B47 RSVD C47 RSVD A48 RSVD B48 GND C48 Expander Bus Con
31. aria e raffreddamento del sistema rimettere sempre le coperture del telaio prima di riaccendere il sistema Operare il sistema senza le coperture al loro proprio posto potrebbe danneggiare i componenti del sistema Per rimettere le coperture del telaio 1 Controllare prima che non si siano lasciati degli attrezzi o dei componenti dentro il sistema 2 Controllare che i cavi dei supporti aggiuntivi ed altri componenti siano stati installati appropriatamente 3 Attaccare le coperture al telaio con le viti tolte in precedenza e avvitarle strettamente 4 Inserire e chiudere a chiave il lucchetto sul retro del sistema per impedire l accesso non autorizzato al sistema 5 Ricollegare tutti i cavi esterni e le prolunghe AC del sistema continua Appendix C Warnings AVVERTENZA Italiano continua Se il sistema stato a lungo in funzione il microprocessore e il dissipatore di calore potrebbero essere surriscaldati Fare attenzione alla presenza di piedini appuntiti e parti taglienti sulle schede e sul telaio E consigliabile l uso di guanti di protezione Esiste il pericolo di un esplosione se la pila non viene sostituita in modo corretto Utilizzare solo pile uguali o di tipo equivalente a quelle consigliate dal produttore Per disfarsi delle pile usate seguire le istruzioni del produttore Il sistema amp progettato per funzionare in un ambiente di lavoro tipo Scegliere una postazione che sia e Pulita e libera da pa
32. connectors 22 keyboard and mouse ports 234 parallel port 235 serial ports 234 video port 236 reinstalling 168 removing 168 ICMB board reinstalling 176 removing 176 bus 21 36 37 211 235 IDE boot hard disk drive 180 CD ROM drive mounting screws 190 removing 188 replacing 190 slide rails 190 controller 210 interface 22 Indicators cooling fault LED yellow 24 drive fault LED yellow 24 front panel LCD 24 power fault LED yellow 24 SCSI drive in recovery mode 116 SCSI drive status descriptions 116 Interconnect backplane 22 265 CPU baseboard signal connector 268 271 T O baseboard power connector 275 signal connector 272 power connector 268 server management connector 267 324 Interconnect backplane assembly installing 154 removing 152 ISA 19 add in board installing 164 bus master slot 162 expansion slot 206 J Jig saw foam air baffle removing 138 Jumpers boot option 215 218 CMOS 215 216 CPU baseboard 240 changing a setting 241 flash memory 215 216 password 215 216 K Keyboard connecting 36 Keyboard mouse controller 22 L Lights CD ROM drive 24 DC power 24 diskette drive 24 power supply 291 Logical unit number LUN SCSI devices 83 87 Mass storage device diskette drive 186 drive bay EMI shield 183 IDE CD ROM 182 188 removing 186 Memory module 21 DIMMs 251 installing 256 removing 259 interleaving 252 reinstalling
33. d fru AT24C02 01 A2 I O Riser FRU frusdr d fru AT24C02 01 AE Power Distribution Backplane FUR frusdr d fru IMBDEVICE L02 00 22 SCSI Hot Swap Backplane FRU frusdr d fru IMBDEVICE 00 CO Term card in Slot 1 frusdr d fru AT24C02 03 AO Term card in Slot 2 frusdr d fru AT24C02 03 A4 Term card in Slot 3 frusdr d fru AT24C02 03 A8 Term card in Slot 4 frusdr d fru AT24C02 03 AC 105 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Displaying a Given Area When the utility is run with the d DMI d FRU or d SDR command line flag the indicated area is displayed Each area represents a sensor one sensor for each instrumented device in the server If the given display function fails because of an inability to parse the data present or a hardware failure the utility displays an error message and exits Displaying DMI Area Each DMI area displayed is headed with the DMI area designated name In each area each field has a field name header followed by the field in ASCII or as a number Example To display the DMI area type frusdr d dmi v p and press lt Enter gt A message similar to the following appears Displaying DMI Area System Information Type 1 8 bytes Manufacturer Intel Product AD450NX Server System Version ASDK128M1P2MBPP Serial Number Z00418630 Board Information Type 2 8 bytes Manufacturer Intel Corp Product AD450NX Server System Version ASDK128M1P2MBPP Serial Number 0123456789 Chassis Inform
34. reinstalling 134 removing 134 top reinstalling 131 removing 128 CPU baseboard 21 component layout 242 DC to DC converters 238 features 237 322 front side bus 239 terminator module 239 V O connector power section 225 249 signal section 247 248 interconnect interface 239 jumpers 240 changing a setting 241 memory connectors signal sections 243 memory interface 238 processors 238 reinstalling 156 removing 156 SEEPROM 238 symmetric multiprocessor 237 Current sensing limits 277 usage 279 D DC to DC converters 237 238 installing 150 removing 150 Device mass storage mounting screws 180 184 slide rails 184 DIMMs installing 256 removing 259 Diskette drive controller 22 ejector button 24 removing 186 replacing 186 Drive bay 3 5 inch 20 5 25 inch 20 182 EMI shields 182 SCSI 182 Drive fault light slow blinking 116 Drive indicators SCSI drive active 116 drive failure 116 drive present 116 Drivers SCSI installing 43 video installing 43 Drives diskette 186 IDE CD ROM 188 E EDO DRAM array 252 Electromagnetic compatibility See EMC EMC notice of test and compliance international 304 Emergency Management Port FRU viewer 101 main console window 95 phonebook 100 requirements 94 server control operations 97 EMI 20 metal shields 182 installing 186 removing 182 Environmental specifications 34 Equipment log 111 119 127 137 179
35. the product s main power disconnect 311 AD450NX Server System Product Guide AVERTISSEMENT Francais 312 Le bloc d alimentation de ce produit ne contient aucune pi ce pouvant tre r par e par l utilisateur Ce produit peut contenir plus d un bloc d alimentation Veuillez contacter un technicien qualifi en cas de probleme Ne pas essayer d utiliser ni modifier le cable d alimentation CA fourni s il ne correspond pas exactement au type requis Le nombre de cables d alimentation CA fournis correspond au nombre de blocs d alimentation du produit Notez que le commutateur CC de mise sous tension hors tension du panneau avant n teint pas l alimentation CA du systeme Pour mettre le systeme hors tension vous devez d brancher chaque cable d alimentation de sa prise CONSIGNES DE S CURIT Lorsque vous ouvrez le bo tier pour acc der a l int rieur du syst me suivez les consignes suivantes 1 Mettez hors tension tous les p riph riques connect s au syst me 2 Mettez le syst me hors tension en mettant l interrupteur g n ral en position OFF bouton poussoir 3 D branchez tous les cordons d alimentation c a du syst me et des prises murales 4 Identifiez et d branchez tous les cables reli s aux connecteurs d E S ou aux acc s derriere le systeme 5 Pour pr venir les d charges lectrostatiques lorsque vous touchez aux composants portez une bande antistatique po
36. to pins 7 A B to allow the server to boot from the recovery BIOS Reinstall the top and side covers plug in the power cords and insert the Flash Update Utility diskette in drive A Turn on the monitor and server After the server boots the speaker emits a single beep and the recovery process starts it takes about three minutes When the recovery process completes the speaker emits two beeps While in the recovery mode there is no screen display on the monitor The keyboard is disabled as the server automatically recovers the BIOS The following beep codes describe the recovery status Beep Code Message 1 Recovery process starting 2 Successful completion no errors 4 The server could not boot from the diskette it may not be bootable Continuous series The wrong BIOS recovery files are being used and or the flash memory jumper of low beeps is in the wrong position Remove the diskette turn off the server and monitor unplug the power cords and remove the top and right side covers Move the jumper from J3H1D pins 7 A B to pins 7 B C the normal boot mode Reinstall the covers and plug in the power cords After running the special recovery mode run the SSU to specify a new password See Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run Updating BMC FPC and HSC Firmware For a copy of the latest BMC FPC and HSC firmware releases contact your dealer or sales representative Before you can update the firmware fr
37. 1 18 2 18 3 18 4 18 5 18 6 18 7 18 8 19 1 21 1 7 1 7 2 16 1 17 1 17 2 18 1 20 1 20 2 20 3 20 4 20 5 SCSISCA 80 Pin COMBCION au sack en 200 MOR AAST io OS 213 J3H1 Configuration Jumper Block u u ne 214 VO Baseboard Layout anna ee eigen 221 J3T J mper ra ae ee ae Cine Gea she ehe 240 CPU Baseboard Layout nn ee a 242 4 1 Interleave With Four DIMMS EEN 254 4 1 Interleave With Eight DIMMS 0ooooocccccccccccocccccnnnnccnonanannnccnnnnnnonananccnnnnncnnnnnnnnnncno 254 4 1 Interleave With DM ida daa aaa 255 4 1 Interleave With 16 DIMMS ANEN 255 Memory Module Layout void Ai 256 DIMM Orientation arrest ir diste 257 Properly Seated DIM ii pa 258 Removing DUM IG 0 deen eege EE 259 Intereonneet Backhlafier stnn ee Le 266 Lithium Back up Battery nee eh 285 EMP Console Access Modes Server configured for console redirection 93 EMP Console Access Modes Server not configured for console redirection 94 Configuration lan 215 J31 Jumpers for VRMs and Server Management 240 JST Jumpers Tor BUS e ci a treet 241 Memory Module DIMM Gupport ENNEN 252 Power Supply AC Input R tings u e rn 278 Power Supply TE e era Brett sda ten a ae 278 Server Board Set Voltages and CurrentS ooococccccccccnncnonccnncconnnnnnccnnncnnnnnnnnncnnncnnnnnnnno 279 Worksheet for Calculating DC Power Usage cooooooccccncccconccanccnncconnnnancnnncccnannnnncnnnnnos 280 Total Combined Powe
38. 283 305 Error messages beep codes 296 302 port 80h codes 296 302 POST error codes 299 ESD 34 162 182 add in boards 162 Expansion slots 206 16 bit ISA 22 32 bit PCI 22 64 bit PCI 22 F F16 bus 265 Fans 21 voltage settings 192 FCC Declaration of Conformity 304 Features server 20 21 22 Front bezel reinstalling 132 removing 132 Index Front panel board 21 reinstalling 158 removing 158 controller 211 switches 21 40 Front side bus 239 terminator module 21 239 reinstalling 146 removing 146 FRUSDR load utility when to run 103 H Hard disk drive hot swapping SCSI drive 116 installing in hot docking bay 114 SCSI 112 Hot docking bay status indicators 116 Hot swap controller 212 Hot swapping hard disk drives 20 I O baseboard 22 AHA 3940AUW SCSI controller 210 AIC 7880 SCSI controller 210 component layout 221 connectors 32 bit PCI 226 64 bit PCI 227 diskette drive port 229 F16 bus 222 front panel 232 IC 232 IDE port 231 ISA 228 legacy 233 USB port 233 wide fast 16 bit SCSI port 230 expansion slots 205 T O riser card 213 IDE controller 210 ISA expansion slot 206 jumpers 214 boot option 215 218 CMOS 215 flash memory 215 216 password 215 323 AD450NX Server System Product Guide PCI expansion slots 206 PCI video controller 207 reinstalling 170 removing 170 SCSI controller 210 server management 211 I O riser card 22 213
39. 7 Pin B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 Signal Pin GND P1E1 GND P1E2 GND P1E3 GND P2E1 GND P2E2 GND P2E3 Signal Pin GND P1E1 GND P1E2 GND P1E3 GND P2E1 GND P2E2 GND P2E3 Signal GND RSVD IO_TMS PWRGDB A20M_3V_L PROC_RESET_L GND BMC_SPI_BUS 5 SMI 3V_L 12C_GLOBAL_SDA GND XOHRTS_L GND XOBE_L 0 GND XOPAR_L GND XOADS_L Signal GND GND GND 12V 12V 12V Signal 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V Pin C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 continued Chapter 19 Interconnect Backplane Description Connectors Interconnect to I O Baseboard Signal Section A B amp C continued Signal GND X0D_L 12 X0D_L 14 X0D_L 15 GND XOCLK GND RSVD RSVD ISP_SDO INTRUSION_L ISP_SDI VCC_STDBY 12C_FPC_SCL 12C_FPC_SDA GND X1D_L 0 X1D_L 1 X1D_L 3 X1D_L 4 GND X1D_L 6 X1D_L 8 X1D_L 9 GND X1D_L 12 X1D_L 14 X1D_L 15 GND X1CLK Pin A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 A35 A36 A37 A38 A39 A40 A41 A42 A43 A44 A45 A46 A47 A48 Signal GND X0D_L 10 GND X0D_L 13 GND RSVD GND ISP_SCLK GND RSVD GND RSVD GND VCC_STDBY GND RSVD GND X1XRTS_L GND X1D_L 2 GND X1D_L 5 GND X1D_L 7 GND X1D_L 10 GND X1D_L 13 GND RSVD Pin B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32 B33
40. 9 2 1 Remove the 3 5 inch hard disk drive from the protective wrapper and place it on an antistatic surface 2 Record the model and serial numbers of the drive in your equipment log 3 Orient the drive carrier so that the handle is toward your left and the metal EMI ESD fingers are toward your right 4 Orient the drive so that the board side faces toward the finger side of the carrier and the SCA connector faces away from you 5 Being careful not to damage the metal fingers of the carrier place it on the drive 6 Place the drive and carrier assembly on an antistatic surface of a table or a workbench so that the drive handle and fingers overlap the edge of the table or the workbench 7 Using four screws of the appropriate size and length not supplied attach the carrier to the drive CAUTION 112 Some specific hard disk drive designs require electrical isolation of the drive from the chassis or other ground paths These drives are usually clearly labeled with this requirement on the drive Full height 1 6 inch drives with this requirement must have an electrical isolator such as durable mylar tape placed between the EMI ESD grounding fingers and the top cover of the drive Failure to isolate this type of drive from the ground path will result in unpredictable operation of the drive including severely impacted performance and data corruption Chapter 9 Hot swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives Installing Hot Swapping ZN
41. BIOS is disabled Select enabled if any devices have multiple logical units No effect if the BIOS is disabled Enabled lets the server boot from a CD The option displays only if the adapter BIOS is configured to include it To boot from a hard drive or other device either disable this option or make sure there is no bootable CD in the drive No effect if the BIOS is disabled When enabled the adapter BIOS supports Int 13h extensions that are required for bootable CD ROMs The option displays only if the adapter BIOS is configured to include bootable CD ROM support You can disable the option if the boot device is nota CD ROM but it does no harm to leave it enabled No effect if the BIOS is disabled continued Chapter 6 SCSISelect Utility When to Run Advanced Configuration Options continued Feature Option Support for UltraSCSI Speed Enabled Disabled SCSI Disk Utilities Menu When you select SCSI Disk Utilities the SCSISelect utility scans the SCSI bus for SCSI devices After scanning the bus it reports a description of each device If a device is present select it and press lt Enter gt to see the SCSI Device SCSI ID 0 No device If a hard disk drive is present options Option select it and press lt Enter gt to display the utilities SCSI ID 1 6 8 15 device SCSI ID 7 AIC 7880 Ultra Ultra W Exit Menu Feature Option Exit Utility Yes No Verify Disk Media No
42. Bays P Drive power LED green Q Drive activity LED green R Drive fault LED yellow When lit continuously it indicates an asserted fault status on one or more hard disk drives in the hot docking bay When flashing it indicates drive reset in progress Chapter 1 Introduction to the High performance Server OM06195 Figure 1 4 Server Controls and Indicators 25 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Server Security 26 There are several ways to prevent unauthorized entry or use of the server Security with a built in key lock a padlock and alarm switches e Secure the front panel controls and drive bays with the two position key lock on the front bezel e Secure the top and side covers to the chassis with a padlock on the back of the server e Activate alarm switches for the doors and covers These switches transmit alarm signals to the VO baseboard Software on the I O baseboard intercepts these signals and alerts the user of unauthorized activity Security with the Setup utility e Set server administrative and user passwords e Set secure mode to prevent keyboard or mouse input and to prevent use of the front panel controls Security with the System Setup Utility SSU e Enable the keyboard lockout timer so that the server requires a password to reactivate the keybo
43. Codes continued CP D6 D8 DA DC FB FC FD Beeps Reason Initialize option ROM error Shutdown error Extended Block Move Shutdown 10 error FRB in progress Five second wait for BMC to initialize FRB 2 watchdog timer failed reset will occur in five seconds POST Error Codes and Messages The table below contains POST error codes and their associated messages Code 0002 0010 0015 0016 0042 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0060 0070 0080 0083 0085 0131 0132 0135 0140 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 0175 Error message Primary boot device not found Cache memory failure do not enable cache Primary output device not found Primary input device not found ISA Config contains invalid info PnP memory conflict PnP 32 bit memory conflict PnP IRQ conflict PnP DMA conflict PnP error log is full Bad PnP serial id checksum Bad PnP resource data checksum Keyboard is locked Please unlock it CMOS time amp date not set Option ROM has bad checksum Shadow of PCI ROM failed Shadow of ISA ROM failed Floppy drive A Floppy drive B Floppy disk controller failure Shadow of System BIOS Failed Disabled CPU slot CPU Failure CPU 1 CPU Failure CPU 2 CPU Failure CPU 3 CPU Failure CPU 4 CPU modules are incompatible or one is not present continued 299 AD450NX Server System Product Guide POST Error Codes and Messages continued Code Error message 0176 Previous CPU Failure
44. GND GND Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND Pin E39 E40 E41 E42 E43 E44 E45 E46 E47 E48 Pin P1E1 P1E2 P1E3 P2E1 P2E2 P2E3 Pin P1E1 P1E2 P1E3 P2E1 P2E2 P2E3 Signal GND GND GND 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V Signal GND GND GND 5V 5V 5V 271 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 12 V Connector J27 Pin P1A1 P1A2 P1A3 P2A1 P2A2 P2A3 Signal 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V Pin P1B1 P1B2 P1B3 P2B1 P2B2 P2B3 Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND 12 V Connectors J28 and J29 Pin P1A1 P1A2 P1A3 P2A1 P2A2 P2A3 Signal 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V Pin P1B1 P1B2 P1B3 P2B1 P2B2 P2B3 Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND P1C1 P1C2 P1C3 P2C1 P2C2 P2C3 Pin P1C1 P1C2 P1C3 P2C1 P2C2 P2C3 Signal 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V Signal 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V P1D1 P1D2 P1D3 P2D1 P2D2 P2D3 Pin P1D1 P1D2 P1D3 P2D1 P2D2 P2D3 Interconnect to I O Baseboard Signal Section Signal RSVD IO_TCK IO_TDO BMC_SPI_BUS 1 BMC_SPI_BUS 6 BMC_SPI_BUS 0 12C_BMC_SCL 12C_BMC_SDA NMI_5V GND XOD_L O XOD_L 1 XOD_L 3 XOD_L 4 GND XOD_L 6 XOD_L 8 XOD_L 9 272 Pin A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 Signal GND RSVD GND IO_TDI GND CPU_SPI_RESET_L GND BMC_SPI_BUS 3 GND IGNNE_3V_L GND XOXRTS_L GND X0D_L 2 GND XOD_L 5 GND XOD_L
45. HSBP_PGM_SDI Ground HSBP_PGM_SDO Ground 201 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 12 V Power Connector Pin O ON OA WY 5 V Power Connector Pin O ON OA FWY Signal 12V_R Ground 12V_R Ground 12 VL Ground 12 VL Ground Not used Ground Signal 5 V Ground 5 V Ground 5 V Ground 5 V Ground 5 V Ground Fan Connector Pin oO ON OA FWY gt gt 202 Signal Ground signal 12 V FAN_PWR Ground signal 12 V FAN_PWR Ground signal 12 V FAN_PWR Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Signal 5 V Ground 5 V Ground 5 V Ground 5 V Ground 5 V Ground Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Signal 12V_R Ground 12V_R Ground 12 VL Ground 12 V_L Ground 12 V FAN_PWR Ground Chapter 15 SCSI Hot docking Backplane Description SCSI IDs Intrusion Switch Connector Pin Signal 1 intrusion 2 Intrusion2 common 3 Intrusion2 common 4 Intrusion_in 203 16 I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers This chapter describes the I O baseboard and tells how to configure the jumpers Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 125 Input Output I O Baseboard Features The I O baseboard provides the primary I O interface of the server The board
46. MD39_L VCC MD43_L VCC MD48_L VCC MD53_L VCC GND GND GND VCC MD61_L VCC MD65_L VCC MD69_L VCC NC VCC GND GND GND VCC CARD_L VCC BANK2_L VCC GND GND GND VCC MA7_L VCC MA12_L Pin B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32 B33 B34 B35 B36 B37 Signal GND DSTBN2_L GND DSTBP2_L GND MD46_L GND MD51_L GND MD54_L GND MD56_L VTT DSTBP3_L GND DSTBN3_L GND MD67_L GND VCC GND CARD_NUM VTT PHIT_L VTT RCMPLT_L GND BANKO_L GND ROW L VTT MA1_L VTT MA5 L GND MA10_L GND Pin C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 C37 continued 261 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Memory Module Connector A B amp C continued Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin VTT A38 VCC B38 TMS C38 GND A39 GND B39 VTT C39 SPARECLKO A40 GND B40 TDI C40 GND A41 GND B41 VTT C41 MDO_L A42 VCC B42 MD1_L C42 GND A43 MD3_L B43 GND C43 MD5_L A44 VCC B44 DSTBNO_L C44 GND A45 MD7_L B45 GND C45 MD9_L A46 VCC B46 DSTBPO_L C46 GND A47 MD11_L B47 GND C47 MD13_L A48 VCC B48 MD14 L C48 GND A49 DOFF1_L B49 GND C49 MD16_L A50 VCC B50 DSEL_L C50 GND A51 GND B51 VTT C51 MUXCLKO A52 GND B52 MD18_L C52 GND A53 GND B53 VTT C53 MD21_L A54 VCC B54 MD22_L C54 GND A55 MD24_L B55 GND
47. None None Comment Format Disk Comment The option displays only if the BIOS is configured to support UltraSCSI speeds Select enabled to use UltraSCSI speeds with the AIC 7880 No effect if the BIOS is disabled Comment This utility performs a low level format on the hard disk drive Jh CAUTION Back up your data before performing a low level format Once started you cannot abort it This utility scans the media of the selected device for defects If it finds bad blocks it prompts you to reassign them If you select yes the blocks will no longer be used No device present This is the SCSI host adapter on the I O baseboard When you finish configuring your SCSI devices select Yes and press lt Enter gt When this message appears Please press any key to reboot Press any key and your server will reboot 85 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Main Menu for AHA 3940AUW The AHA 3940AUW host adapter in the server provides two independent SCSI channels You must configure each channel separately with the SCSISelect utility 86 You have an AHA 3940AU AUW AUWD in your system Move the cursor to the bus device channel of the one to be configured and press lt Enter gt lt F5 gt Toggle color monochrome Host Adapter Option AHA 3940AU AUW AUWD at Configure View Host Bus Device Channel Adapter Settings 00 0B A SCSI Disk Utilities Bus Device Channel 00 0B A 00 0B B Comment Press l
48. O baseboard cable 159 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Retaining Bracket for Add in Boards Removing the Retaining Bracket for Add in Boards See Figure 12 15 1 2 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Loosen the captive screw on the bottom end of the bracket Remove the bracket by pulling the bottom end slightly toward you and sliding the top end tab out of the slot in the chassis Set the bracket aside Reinstalling the Retaining Bracket for Add in Boards See Figure 12 15 1 2 3 160 Before reinstalling the retaining bracket make sure that all expansion slot covers are in place Reinstall the bracket by inserting the top end tab in the slot in the chassis Push the bracket up against the chassis and insert the captive screw in the threaded hole in the chassis Tighten the screw to 8 0 inch pounds Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling OM06723 Figure 12 15 Retaining Bracket for Add in Boards A B C D Retaining bracket Captive screw Tab Chassis slot 161 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Add in Boards The VO baseboard provides 11 PCI bus master slots and one ISA bus master slot They accept any add in PCI and ISA boards or any add in board that is co
49. Reinstalling the Snap on Drive Bay Cover 134 See Figure 11 4 1 2 3 Insert the rigid tabs along the bottom edge of the snap on cover into the notches in the front bezel Tilt the cover slightly to the right so that it clears the door latch on the left Place your thumb below the latch and gently push in on the cover until it snaps on the bezel Push up on the bottom of the latch until it snaps in place Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling OM08270 Figure 11 4 Snap on Plastic Drive Bay Cover A Snap on cover B Rigid tabs C Latch 135 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling This chapter tells how to remove and reinstall major server components Because the CPU and I O baseboards are mounted back to back the procedures start with the covers and end up with the baseboards Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 125 Tools and Supplies You Need e Phillips cross head screwdriver 1 bit and 2 bit e Small flat bladed screwdriver e Antistatic wrist strap recommended e Penor pencil Equipment Log Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B Equipment Log to record the model and serial numbers of the server all installed options and any other pertinent informa
50. SCSI Bus Interface Definitions Host Adapter SCSI ID 0 7 15 Use this option to change the SCSI ID of the host adapter Each device on the SCSI bus including the adapter must have a unique ID The ID defines the device and the priority of the ID determines which device controls the bus when two or more devices try to use it simultaneously Each adapter on the bus whether 8 or 16 bit has a default ID of 7 the highest priority on the bus SCSI Parity Checking Enabled When enabled the host adapter always checks Disabled parity when reading from the SCSI bus to verify the correct transmission of data from the SCSI devices Select disabled if any attached devices do not support SCSI parity Host Adapter SCSI Termination Low On High On The I O baseboard does not support this feature Low Off High Off Low On High On enables termination for both low Low Off High On and high bytes of the 16 bit Wide SCSI bus Bits 0 through 7 are the low byte and bits 8 through 15 are the high byte Additional Options Boot Device Options Press lt Enter gt See Boot Device Configuration Menu on page 83 SCSI Device Configuration Press lt Enter gt See SCSI Device Configuration Menu on page 83 Advanced Configuration Options Press lt Enter gt See Advanced Configuration Options Menu on page 84 82 Chapter 6 SCSISelect Utility When to Run Boot Device Configuration Menu Feature Option Boot Target ID 0 15 Boot LUN Number 0 7 Comme
51. To support the 1 25 MB 3 5 inch requires a 3 5 inch 3 mode diskette drive Press lt Enter gt for options Pressing lt Enter gt attempts to detect the drive type for drives that comply with ANSI specifications User lets you enter the parameters of the hard disk drive installed at this connection Auto autotypes the hard disk drive installed here 1 39 lets you select the predetermined hard disk drive installed here CD ROM a CD ROM is installed here ATAPI Removable removable disk drive installed here Enabled allows 32 bit IDE data transfers Press lt Enter gt for options Pressing lt Enter gt attempts to detect the drive type for drives that comply with ANSI specifications continued 51 Main Menu continued Feature Type 32 bit I O Ultra DMA Mode Secondary Master Autotype Fixed Disk Type 32 bit I O Ultra DMA Mode Secondary Slave Autotype Fixed Disk Type 32 bit I O Ultra DMA Mode Processor Information Processor 1 Processor 1 Processor 2 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Option User Auto 1 39 CD ROM ATAPI Removable Disabled Enabled Disabled None Press lt Enter gt User Auto 1 39 CD ROM ATAPI Removable Disabled Enabled Disabled None Press lt Enter gt User Auto 1 39 CD ROM ATAPI Removable Disabled Enabled Disabled Press lt Enter gt Description User lets you enter the parameters of
52. When to Run Default values are in bold typeface and auto configured values are shaded Feature System Time System Date Legacy Diskette A Legacy Diskette B Primary Master Autotype Fixed Disk Type Multi sector Transfers LBA Mode Control 32 bit I O Transfer Mode Ultra DMA Mode Primary Slave Autotype Fixed Disk Option HH MM SS MM DD YYYY Disabled 360 KB 5 4 1 2 MB 5 720 KB 3 Lei 1 44 1 25 MB 3 12 2 88 MB 3 Y Disabled 360 KB 5 4 1 2 MB 5 4 720 KB 3 Lei 1 44 1 25 MB 3 12 2 88 MB 3 Y CD ROM Press lt Enter gt User Auto 1 39 CD ROM ATAPI Removable Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Standard Disabled None Press lt Enter gt Description Set the System Time To select a field press lt Tab gt lt Shift Tab gt or lt Enter gt Then type in a new value If you replace the battery the default time is 00 00 This is a 24 hour clock Set the System Date To select a field press lt Tab gt lt Shift Tab gt or lt Enter gt Then type in a new value If you replace the battery the default date is Jan 1990 Select the diskette type for drive A The 1 25 MB 3 5 inch refers to a 1024 byte sector Japanese media format To support the 1 25 MB 3 5 inch requires a 3 5 inch 3 mode diskette drive Select the diskette type for drive B The size 1 25 MB 3 5 inch refers to a 1024 byte sector Japanese media format
53. a 3 1 pattern in the bottom of the chassis Each power supply has an integrated fan for cooling and a detachable power cord that plugs into the AC inlet receptacle on the power supply The power distribution backplane provides the connectors for the hot swap power supplies It also provides the interface logic for power supply related management functions such as e power supply presence detection e power supply fault signal reporting e 240VA overload detection and shutdown Current sensing limits the energy supplied by the power distribution backplane to levels generally accepted as operator accessible areas less than 240 VA for the CSA Level 3 category without the use of interlocks This means that while the server is energized the current sensing feature will shut down the entire power system if any single output from the backplane to operator accessible areas SCSI hot docking backplane only exceeds 240 VA Care must be taken not to overload a branch circuit of the AC mains by plugging too many power cords into a single AC circuit We recommend plugging the power cord of each power supply into a separate circuit If a power supply fails in the redundant power system the yellow power supply failure LED on the front panel starts flashing The supply can be hot swapped removed and replaced without turning off the power or impacting server operations The power cord must be unplugged from the failed supply before it can be hot swapped
54. adapter appears you can run the included SCSISelect utility by pressing lt Ctrl A gt when this message appears Press lt Ctrl gt lt A gt for SCSISelect TM Utility If you have installed SCSI devices in the server press lt Ctrl A gt When the utility appears follow the instructions on the monitor to configure each host adapter and run the SCSI disk utilities See Chapter 6 SCSISelect Utility When to Run for instructions 47 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 48 If POST detects an error it displays the error code the server beeps once and this message appears Press lt F2 gt for Setup lt ESC gt to Boot To enter Setup Press lt F2 gt When the Setup utility appears follow the instructions on the monitor To boot the server press lt ESC gt However if a drive with bootable media is not detected the server beeps once and this message appears Operating System not found If POST did not detect an error and you choose not to run the SCSISelect Utility POST continues the server beeps once and this message appears Operating System not found See Chapter 2 On site Installation Installing the Server for instructions on creating software installation diskettes If the server halts before POST completes running it emits a beep code indicating a fatal system error that requires immediate attention If POST can display a message on the video monitor it causes the speaker to beep twice
55. and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 125 Tools and Supplies You Need e Phillips cross head screwdriver 1 bit and 2 bit e Antistatic wrist strap recommended e Pen or pencil Equipment Log Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B Equipment Log to record the model and serial numbers of the server all installed options and any other pertinent information about the server You will need this information when running the SSU 283 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Back up Battery The lithium battery on the I O baseboard powers the real time clock RTC for up to ten years in the absence of power The RTC contains 256 bytes of general purpose RAM that stores the system BIOS configuration information clock registers and general purpose control registers Contact your sales representative or dealer for a list of approved replacement devices and available service CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the equipment manufacturer Discard used battery according to manufacturer s instructions A ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig h ndtering Udskiftning ma kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte batteri tilbage til leverand ren A ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosjonsfare Ved utski
56. as the message appears Note the screen display and write down the beep code you hear this information is useful for your service representative For a listing of beep codes and error messages that POST can generate see Chapter 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages 4 Setup Utility When to Run The flash resident BIOS Setup utility is used to configure I O baseboard resources It is stored in both flash memory NVRAM and the battery backed memory of the real time clock RTC on the VO baseboard When to Run the BIOS Setup Utility The BIOS Setup is a flash based configuration utility that is used to configure onboard resources and to set user selectable options such as boot device ordering keyboard autorepeat and security Use Setup to configure the server into a bootable state and then use the SSU and other utilities to further configure the server Setup lets you change the server configuration defaults It does not allow you to enter or change information about PCI or ISA add in boards you must use the SSU instead Setup stores the configuration values in flash memory they take effect when you boot the server POST checks these values against the actual hardware configuration if they do not agree POST generates an error message You must then run Setup to specify the correct configuration You can run Setup with or without an operating system being present Because values entered using Setup are overwritten when
57. attention aux broches aigu s des cartes et aux bords tranchants du capot Nous vous recommandons l usage de gants de protection Danger d explosion si la batterie n est pas remont e correctement Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du m me type ou d un type quivalent recommand par le fabricant Disposez des piles us es selon les instructions du fabricant Le syst me a t con u pour fonctionner dans un cadre de travail normal L emplacement choisi doit tre e Propre et d pourvu de poussi re en suspension sauf la poussi re normale e Bien a r et loin des sources de chaleur y compris du soleil direct e A l abri des chocs et des sources de vibrations e isol de forts champs lectromagn tiques g en r s par des appareils lectriques e Dans les r gions sujettes aux orages magn tiques il est recomand de brancher votre syst me a un supresseur de surtension et de d brancher toutes les lignes de t l communications de votre modem durant un orage e Muni d une prise murale correctement mise la terre e Suffisamment spacieux pour vous permettre d acc der aux cables d alimentation ceux ci tant le seul moyen de mettre le syst me hors tension 313 AD450NX Server System Product Guide WARNUNG Deutsch 314 Benutzer k nnen am Netzger t dieses Produkts keine Reparaturen vornehmen Das Produkt enth lt m glicherweise mehrere Netzge
58. converter provides the 1 5 V AGTL termination voltage required by the CPU baseboard memory modules and processors A second onboard linear converter provides 2 5 V for the logic on the CPU baseboard clock buffers and voltage shifters Both converters use the 5 V supply rail as source voltage DS1624 SEEPROM 238 When the DS 1624 on the CPU baseboard is accessed via the PC bus it provides a temperature reading of the ambient temperature of the CPU baseboard The DS1624 also provides e time and date the CPU baseboard was manufactured e name of the board manufacturer e name and description of the board e serial number of the board e part number of the board Chapter 17 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Interconnect Interface The CPU baseboard interfaces with the I O baseboard through the interconnect backplane The backplane provides the primary and secondary expander buses system management signals system clock and reset signals and legacy signals The buses provide source synchronous high speed bidirectional point to point links between the CPU baseboard and the I O baseboard Each expander bus has enough bandwidth for two 32 bit 33 MHz PCI buses or one 64 bit 33 MHz PCI bus The expander buses use AGTL signaling technology Front Side Bus The front side bus FSB is an ECC protected 64 bit bus that uses AGTL signaling technology and runs at 100 MHz The FSB requires termination modules in each
59. des Systems falls eine Verschlu einrichtung installiert ist 2 Entfernen Sie alle Schrauben der Geh useabdeckung 3 Nehmen Sie die Abdeckung ab Zur ordnungsgem en K hlung und L ftung mu die Geh useabdeckung immer wieder vor dem Einschalten installiert werden Ein Betrieb des Systems ohne angebrachte Abdeckung kann Ihrem System oder Teile darin besch digen Um die Abdeckung wieder anzubringen 1 Vergewissern Sie sich da Sie keine Werkzeuge oder Teile im Innern des Systems zur ckgelassen haben 2 berpr fen Sie alle Kabel Zusatzkarten und andere Komponenten auf ordnungsgem en Sitz und Installation 3 Bringen Sie die Abdeckungen wieder am Geh use an indem Sie die zuvor gel sten Schrauben wieder anbringen Ziehen Sie diese gut an 4 Bringen Sie die Verschlu einrichtung Padlock wieder an und schlie en Sie diese um ein unerlaubtes Offnen des Systems zu verhindern 5 Schlie en Sie alle externen Kabel und den AC Stromanschlu stecker Ihres Systems wieder an Fortsetzung Appendix C Warnings WARNUNG Deutsch Fortsetzung Der Mikroprozessor und der K hler sind m glicherweise erhitzt wenn das System in Betrieb ist Au erdem k nnen einige Platinen und Geh useteile scharfe Spitzen und Kanten aufweisen Arbeiten an Platinen und Geh use sollten vorsichtig ausgef hrt werden Sie sollten Schutzhandschuhe tragen Bei falschem Einsetzen einer neuen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr Die Batterie d
60. e Disabled no configuration e _Enabled user configuration e Auto BIOS or OS chooses the configuration e OS Controlled displayed when controlled by the OS Set the base UO address for the diskette controller Enabled automatically sets two way or four way permuting based on the memory configuration Enabled requires e number of rows to be a power of two e all rows to be the same size e all populated rows to be adjacent and start at row 0 Enabled requires a symmetric RAM configuration between two memory modules continued 55 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 56 Advanced Menu continued Feature Base RAM Step Extended RAM Step L2 Cache ISA Expansion Aliasing Memory Scrubbing Restreaming Buffer Read Prefetch for PXBOA Read Prefetch for PXBOB Read Prefetch for PXB1A Multiboot Support Special VGA Devnode Option 1 MB 1KB Every location 1 MB 1KB Every location Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled 16 32 64 16 32 64 16 32 64 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Description Tests base memory once per MB or once per KB or every location Tests extended memory once per MB or once per KB or every location Enabled causes the secondary cache to be sized and enabled Disabled causes the L2 cache to be disabled for core clock frequency bus ratios equal to 2 Enabled causes every I O access with an a
61. e change default values e check and or change SCSI device settings that may conflict with those of other devices in the server e doa low level format on SCSI devices installed in the server Running the SCSISelect Utility 1 When this message appears on the video monitor Press lt Ctrl gt lt A gt for SCSISelect TM Utility 2 Press lt Ctrl A gt to run the utility When the main menu for the host adapter appears choose the adapter that you want to configure each SCSI bus accepts up to 15 devices amp NOTE If the SCSI elect utility detects multiple host adapters in your server the utility displays the PCI bus number and PCI device number Bus Device xx xxh of the host adapters The host adapter menus are slightly different see Main Menu for AIC 7880 on page 82 and Main Menu for AHA 3940AUW on page 86 81 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Use the following keys to navigate through the menus and submenus Press To ESC Exit the utility Enter Select an option T Return to a previous option y Move to the next option F5 Switch between color and monochrome F6 Reset to host adapter defaults Main Menu for AIC 7880 Host Adapter Option Comment AIC 7880 Ultra Ultra W at Configure View Host Press lt Enter gt to view the Configuration Menu Bus Device 00 0Ah Adapter Settings SCSI Disk Utilities Press lt Enter gt to view the SCSI Disk Utilities Menu Configuration Menu Feature Option Comment
62. following options Display HEX Verbose toggles between HEX mode and interpreted mode of displaying FRU records Window gives options for displaying currently open windows Help Help Topics help topics for EMP Console Help About provides version information 101 8 FRU and SDR Load Utility When to Run The Field Replacement Unit FRU and Sensor Data Record SDR Load Utility is a DOS based program used to update the server management subsystem s product level FRU SDR and the Desktop Management Interface DMI nonvolatile storage components EEPROMs The load utility e discovers the product configuration based on instructions in a master configuration file e displays the FRU information it may have values the user can change e updates the nonvolatile storage device EEPROM associated with the Baseboard Management Controller BMC that holds the SDR and FRU area e updates the DMI area located in the BIOS nonvolatile storage device e generically handles FRU devices that may not be associated with the BMC When to Run the FRUSDR Load Utility You should run the FRUSDR Load Utility each time you upgrade or replace the hardware in your server excluding add in boards hard drives and RAM For example if you replace an array of fans you need to run the utility It programs the sensors that need to be monitored for server management The server must be reloaded to properly initialize the sensors after pro
63. hard disk drive properly configured LI Are the SCSI controller board signal cables properly connected to the SCSI hot docking backplane If you received error messages refer to Error Codes and Messages on page 295 for information about error messages If you did not receive error messages run the SSU and make sure the hard disk drive is configured with the correct parameters Chapter 5 If the problem persists there may be a problem with the hard disk drive the add in controller board I O baseboard drive signal cable or LED connector Contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance Chapter 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages Problems With Application Software If you have problems with application software do the following 1 Verify that the software is properly configured for the server Refer to the software installation and operation documentation to set up and use the software 2 Try a different copy of the software to see if the problem is with the copy you are using 3 Make sure all cables are installed correctly 4 Verify that the baseboard jumpers are set correctly 5 If other software runs correctly on the server contact your vendor about the failing software If the problem persists contact the software vendor s customer service representative for assistance Server Powers Up and Immediately Powers Down If the server powers up after a DC power failure and then im
64. is disabled When yes required for no SCSI hard drives the host adapter sends the Start Unit Command to the SCSI device during bootup This reduces the load on the server power supply by allowing the adapter to power up SCSI devices one at a time when you boot the server The adapter sends the command to the device with the lowest SCSI ID When it responds the adapter sends the command to the next highest SCSI ID When no each device powers up in a normal fashion if the device has been jumpered to wait for a start command it will not start yes When yes the host adapter BIOS controls the SCSI device if no it is an Int 13 device such as a SCSI disk drive When no the adapter BIOS does not scan SCSI IDs for devices to control device driver software must be used to control the SCSI devices 83 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Advanced Configuration Options Feature Reset SCSI Bus at IC Initialization Host Adapter BIOS Configuration Utility Reserves BIOS Space Support Removable Disks Under BIOS as Fixed Disks Extended BIOS Translation for DOS Drives greater than 1 GB Display lt Ctrl A gt Message During BIOS Initialization Multiple LUN Support BIOS Support for Bootable CD ROM BIOS Support for Int13 Extensions 84 Option Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Boot Only All Disks Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled
65. key to enter Setup message is displayed on the screen At the end of POST if the lt Esc gt key was pressed a pop up boot menu is displayed It allows you to change the boot sequence or to enter Setup and permanently change the sequence To override the boot sequence do this 1 Press the reset switch on the front panel to reboot the server the CD can be in the drive or not 2 When POST displays this message Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP 3 Press lt Esc gt and wait for the following boot menu to display Boot Menu Use lt gt or lt gt to select a boot device or the Setup utility Press lt Enter gt to accept or lt Esc gt to exit Diskette Drive Removable Devices Hard Drive ATAPI CD ROM Drive lt Enter Setup gt up OM08360 Figure 2 6 Boot Menu 4 From the boot menu select the CD ROM drive and press lt Enter gt 5 When you see the following pop up menu press lt Enter gt to boot from the CD CD ROM BOOT MENU 1 Hard Drive OM08361 Figure 2 7 CD ROM Boot Menu 44 Chapter 2 On site Installation Installing the Server The server should now boot from the CD displaying a menu bar that includes creating diskettes diagnostics reading printing the manual and quitting to DOS A CAUTION If the server does not operate as described in this chapter contact a qualified service technician 45 3 Power on Self Test Description
66. module as described in Chapter 12 9 Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 10 Reconnect all external cables and the power cords to the server 11 Turn on your monitor and then your server 12 Run the SSU to configure the server and to properly attribute ECC memory Failure to do so may degrade the performance of your server For information about running the SSU see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run 259 AD450NX Server System Product Guide System Management Interface The devices on I2C bus of the memory module provide system management software with module operating temperature DIMM configuration and field replacement unit FRU data The devices also provide e time and date the module was manufactured e name of the module manufacturer e name and description of the module e serial number of the module e part number of the module 260 Signal GND VTT GND MD41_L GND MD45_L GND MD50_L GND DCMPLT_L GND MUXCLK1 GND MD59 L GND MD63_L GND VTT GND MD71_L GND VCC GND SPARECLK1 GND VTT GND CMNDO_L GND GDCMPLT_L GND RCGCLK GND MA4_L GND MA9 _L GND Chapter 18 Memory and Memory Terminator Modules Description Adding Memory Pin A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 A35 A36 A37 Memory Module Connector Signal MD36_L VCC
67. must be 4 8 12 or 16 one memory module and one memory terminator configuration Chapter 18 Memory and Memory Terminator Modules Description Adding Memory e Install an equal number of DIMMs on each memory module in the two memory module configuration except when only four DIMMs are used In that case all four DIMMs are on the primary memory module installed in connector J18 on the CPU baseboard e All DIMMs on a memory module are identical in size and speed e DIMMs may differ in size and speed between memory modules However the maximum data transfer rate can only be provided when the banks of each module are configured identically through module to module interleaving as indicated in the rules below To take advantage of address bit permuting ABP which increases memory access performance across sequential cache line accesses the following rules must be followed e All banks that are used must be populated with four DIMMs e There must be a power of two banks populated 2 4 8 or 16 e All banks in an ABP group two banks in 2 bank permuting or four banks in 4 bank permuting must be the same size e All populated banks must be adjacent and start at bank 0 e Iftwo memory modules are in the server both must be configured to allow equivalent ABP settings For example the chip set cannot support 2 bank permuting on one module and 4 bank permuting on the other To take advantage of module to module interleaving which pr
68. placed it in one Position the baseboard over the snap on and threaded standoffs on the center bulkhead of the chassis Press the baseboard onto the snap on standoffs and insert the screws loosely into the threaded standoffs Make sure the baseboard is properly seated and then tighten all screws to 8 0 inch pounds Connect the interconnect backplane onto the connectors of the I O and CPU baseboards as described earlier Attach the cartridge guides to the CPU baseboard and to the center bulkhead with the captive screws and tighten them to 8 0 inch pounds Reinstall the processors memory modules and any terminator modules as described earlier Reinstall the two three fan array assemblies as described earlier Reinstall the air baffle as described earlier Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling A B ea NS Q O OM06721 Figure 12 13 CPU Baseboard A Snap on standoffs three B Screws six 157 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Front Panel Board The front panel board contains the server controls and indicators It is mounted on snap on and threaded standoffs inside the chassis Removing the Front Panel Board See Figure 12 14 1 2 a Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety
69. resources the card requires to function properly If the CFG file is unavailable you must manually create it or define the card through the SSU Defining an ISA card consists of specifying the name of the card and the resources it consumes This allows the RCA to consider the ISA card resource requirements when the RCA tries to resolve conflicts The system BIOS also uses the information to configure the hardware when the system boots 1 To add or remove ISA card resources click on the appropriate resource buttons select the desired value and click on Add or Remove 2 After you complete the necessary information click on Save 3 To edit a card click on Load to retrieve the card information After making changes click on Save 4 To create a card click on New 5 To remove a current definition of a card click on Delete Define ISA Card Board Name Close Type Lx Communications Device al Slot Help 8 Bit Slot D Bl Resources Memory Aor Save Load New Board Delete Board ZZ E Oo Figure 5 3 Define ISA Window Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run Adding and Removing ISA Cards Adding and removing cards through the RCA provides a way for the RCA to run its conflict detection algorithms on the resources requested by the cards This alerts you to any possible problems with that particular card in the current configuration e To add an ISA card 1 Click on Add ISA Card in the RCA
70. the 16 bit Wide SCSI bus Bits 0 through 7 are the low byte and bits 8 through 15 are the high byte See Boot Device Configuration Menu on page 87 See SCSI Device Configuration Menu on page 88 See Advanced Configuration Options Menu on page 89 Allows you to boot from either channel The default boot device is at SCSI ID 0 with logical unit number LUN O To specify a different boot device choose a different SCSI ID 0 through 7 on 8 bit adapters O through 15 on 16 bit adapters If the boot device has multiple logical units you must also specify the boot LUN It can be 0 through 7 on 8 bit or 16 bit adapters If you disable Multiple LUN Support in the Advanced Configuration menu specifying a number here has no effect 87 AD450NX Server System Product Guide SCSI Device Configuration Menu Feature Option Comment SCSI Device ID 0 15 Initiate Sync Negotiation yes When yes the host adapter initiates synchronous no negotiation with the SCSI device When no the adapter does not initiate synchronous negotiation However ifthe device initiates synchronous negotiation the adapter always responds Maximum Sync Transfer Rate 40 0 The 16 bit channel of the host adapter provides an effective 32 0 maximum synchronous data transfer rate of 40MB sec 26 8 20 0 16 0 13 4 10 0 Enable Disconnection yes When yes the channel lets the SCSI device disconnect from no the SCSI bus When no the device cannot disconnect
71. the 3 5 inch diskette drive bay until it stops SS 2 Chapter 13 Boot Drives and Removable Media Drives Installing Removing Replacing Secure the drive to the bay with the screws you removed earlier tighten them firmly between 4 0 and 6 0 inch pounds Connect the keyed signal and power cables to the drive The red stripe on the signal cable faces toward the center of the drive it indicates pin 1 Reinstall the snap on plastic drive bay cover as described in Chapter 11 Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Run the SSU to specify that the diskette drive is installed in the server For information about running this utility see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run OM06740 Figure 13 7 Diskette Drive A moO D Power cable Signal cable Diskette drive Two screws Drive bay 187 AD450NX Server System Product Guide IDE CD ROM Drive The server comes with an IDE CD ROM drive installed in the top 5 25 inch drive bay Contact your sales representative or dealer for a list of approved add in devices Removing the IDE CD ROM Drive See Figures 13 2 13 3 13 8 and 13 9 188 1 2 m Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the snap on plastic drive bay cover as described in Chapter 11 Disconnect t
72. the SCSI backplane from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one Position the backplane over the plastic right angled standoffs on the back of the hot docking bays Start with the last column of standoffs on the CPU baseboard side of the chassis Press the backplane onto the standoffs and slide it to your right until it stops Make sure that it is properly seated under each standoff Reinstall the retaining bracket on the right side of the hot docking bay with the screws you removed earlier and tighten them to 8 0 inch pounds Connect the SCSI signal cables to channels A and B Connect the power distribution cables and the signal cable to the SCSI backplane connectors Connect the three fan cables to the connectors on top edge of the SCSI backplane Connect the two wire door sensor cable to the connector on top of the SCSI backplane Remove the SCSI hard disk drives from the antistatic protective wrappers if you placed them in wrappers Reinstall the drives in their original hot docking bays Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling 11 Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 OM06732 Figure 12 22 SCSI Backplane A Screws two B Retaining bracket C SCSI backplane 173 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Power Distribution Backplane The power backplane distributes the power load of the server among three or four 420 watt autoranging power supplie
73. the SSU Remotely To run the SSU remotely you must invoke the SSU BAT file with the t switch and redirect the text mode output via BIOS console redirection The t switch puts the display in text mode and allows the console to be viewed and controlled via BIOS console redirection First configure the server for BIOS console redirection Then configure the modem to auto answer and to modem reaction to DTR set to return to command state After configuring the server it should be booted to a DOS prompt either locally or remotely through the EMP Once the server boots the remote user can use any ANSI terminal emulation program to connect to the configured COM port and invoke SSU t This process requires a bootable DOS partition and all files required for the SSU to run must be on the server Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run Starting the SSU The SSU consists of a collection of task oriented modules plugged into a common framework called the Application Framework AF The AF provides a launching point for individual tasks and a location for setting customization information 1 Turn on your video monitor and your system 2 There are two ways to start the SSU a From a set of SSU diskettes created from the CD Insert SSU diskette 1 in drive A and press the push button reset switch or lt Ctrl Alt Del gt to reboot your server from the diskette Follow the screen prompts b From the Server Configuration Software CD Inser
74. the tabs along the front of the cover from the slots in the chassis 10 Slide the cover backward about an inch and lift it straight up Set the cover aside 128 Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling N Dr pz 7 el Q Figure 11 1 Top Cover OM07152 A Top cover B Padlock C Three screws D Built in handles E Remove top cover 129 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Removing a Side Cover See Figure 11 2 1 Grasp the top edge of the side cover and lift it straight up about an inch to disengage the tab in the middle of cover and the tabs along the bottom of the cover from the flanges of the chassis lt gt NOTE Because of the strip magnets attached to the edges of the chassis the side covers are difficult to remove 2 Pullthe top edge of the cover toward you to break the magnetic field of the strip magnets Set the cover aside OM06709 Figure 11 2 Side Covers A Middle tab B Bottom tabs Reinstalling a Side Cover The side covers are not identical make sure you reinstall the covers on the appropriate sides of the server See Figure 11 2 A CAUTION When you reinstall a side cover be careful not to dislodge the strip magnets attached to the edges and flanges of the chassis 130 Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 1 Before reinstalling the side covers make sure you did not le
75. to complete This automatically clears the password See Chapter 3 Power on Self Test Description Running 7 Turn off the server unplug the power cords and remove the top and right side covers 8 Move the jumper from J3H1C pins 5 A B to pins 5 B C 9 Reinstall the covers and plug in the power cords 10 Run the SSU to configure your server See Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run En Updating the BIOS 216 The jumper on J3H1B pins 3 B C applies 12 V power to the VPP pin on the flash memory device This allows you to update the BIOS in flash memory with the Flash Update Utility Moving the jumper to pins 3 A B protects the contents of flash memory For a copy of the latest system BIOS release contact your dealer or sales representative Chapter 16 I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Before you can update the system BIOS from the Flash Update Utility diskette you must make the diskette MS DOS bootable You must have either MS DOS version 5 00 or 6 00 or greater installed on C DOS To prevent accidentally installing a BIOS for a different type of system the update utility insures that the BIOS matches the target system gt NOTE Please review the update utility instructions and the release notes distributed with the update utility and BIOS code before attempting to update the BIOS The BIOS update utility allows you to update the BIOS in flash memory user and logo are
76. toward the SCSI backplane and the three power cables of the interconnect backplane to the power distribution backplane 9 Reinstall the two three fan arrays assembly as described earlier 10 Reinstall the air baffle as described earlier 11 Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 155 AD450NX Server System Product Guide CPU Baseboard Removing the CPU Baseboard See Figure 12 13 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the air baffle as described earlier Remove the two three fan array assemblies as described earlier Remove the processors memory modules and any terminator modules as described earlier Loosen the captive screws in the bases of the S E C cartridge guides Remove the cartridge guides they come out as one unit and set them aside Disconnect the interconnect backplane from the I O and CPU baseboards as described earlier Remove and save the screws that attach the CPU baseboard to the center bulkhead of the chassis Pull the baseboard toward you to unsnap it from the snap on standoffs Place the baseboard on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper Reinstalling the CPU Baseboard See Figure 12 13 156 1 2 7 8 9 10 Remove CPU baseboard from the antistatic protective wrapper if you
77. window 2 Specify the directory for the CFG file 3 Select the file and click on Ok e To remove an ISA card 1 Select a valid ISA card in the Devices section of the RCA window 2 Click on Remove ISA Card 71 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Modifying Resources Modifying the resources of a device may be necessary to accommodate certain operating systems applications and drivers It may also be necessary to modify resources to resolve a conflict e To modify the resources associated with a device 1 Highlight the device in the Devices section of the RCA window 2 Press the spacebar or lt Enter gt or double click on the entry This displays the functions of the selected device along with possible choices and the resources associated with those choices e To make a modification 1 Highlight the function in the Configuration window 2 Press the spacebar or lt Enter gt or double click on the entry this updates the Choice and resource lists 3 Press the tab key to get to the Choice list and press lt Enter gt Use the arrow keys to select a proper choice and press lt Enter gt again gt 5 Ifthe choice allows multiple possible values for a particular resource use the hot key to select a resource and press the spacebar or double click on the resource 6 Select the desired resource and click on Ok Baseboard Skstem Board Function System Group e mi Extended Memory Options 0On B
78. you are installing a SCSI hard disk drive each SCSI device in the server must have a unique SCSI ID For example the default address for a SCSI CD ROM drive is ID 5 If necessary use the configuration jumpers on the back of the drive to change the ID For reference record the SCSI ID of the drive in your equipment log Orient the drive so that the board side faces up and the connectors face to the right and place the drive on an antistatic surface Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove and save the screw that attaches the drive carrier to the 3 5 inch boot drive bay Slide the carrier toward the fans to disengage the carrier tabs from the bay Orient the carrier above the drive so that the flanges and tabs face upward place the carrier on the drive and align the screw holes in the carrier with the ones in the drive Using four screws of the appropriate size and length not supplied attach the carrier to the drive Orient the drive and carrier assembly on the 3 5 inch boot drive bay so that the carrier tabs face down and the drive connectors face toward the fans Slide the assembly toward the front panel board to engage the tabs in the slots of the bay Using the screw you removed in step 5 secure the drive to the bay tighten the screw firmly between 4 0 and 6 0 inch pounds Connect the power cable to the device For an IDE hard disk drive connect the IDE signa
79. you run the SSU you should run Setup only under the following conditions e If the diskette drive is disabled e If the server has a diskette drive that is disabled or improperly configured use Setup to configure the server into a bootable state and then use the SSU and other utilities to further configure the server In Setup you can enable the drive so you can use the SSU If necessary you can disable the diskette drive again after exiting the SSU e If the server does not have a diskette drive or it is disabled use Setup to configure the server e Ifyou have installed only an ISA add in board in your server If the server has a properly configured enabled diskette drive use the SSU to configure the server Information entered using the SSU overrides any entered using Setup Running the Setup Utility You can enter Setup under several conditions e when you turn on the server e when you reboot the server by pressing the push button reset switch on the front panel e when you reboot the server by pressing lt Ctrl Alt Del gt while at the DOS operating system prompt e when you turn on or reset your server after an orderly shutdown of an operating system other than DOS 49 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 50 Each time you turn on or reboot your server POST begins and after a few seconds displays this message Press lt F2 gt to enter Setup After pressing F2 a few seconds may pass before entering Setup while PO
80. 0 68 32K 1024 x 768 78 7 60 75 68 32K S S 1024 x 768 94 5 68 3 85 69 32K S z 1280 x 1024 75 48 43 69 32K 1280 x 1024 108 65 60 6C 16 256K 160 x 64 8x 16 1280 X 1024 75 48 43 6D 256 256K 160 x 64 8x 16 1280 X 1024 75 48 43 6D 256 256K 160 x 64 8x 16 1280 X 1024 108 65 60 6D 256 256K 160 x 64 8x 16 1280 X 1024 126 76 71 2 6D 256 256K 160 x 64 8x 16 1280 X 1024 135 80 75 71 16M S 640 X 480 25 31 5 60 71 16M 640 X 480 31 5 37 9 72 71 16M S a 640 X 480 31 5 37 5 75 71 16M S S 640 X 480 36 43 3 85 74 64K S S 1024 X 768 44 9 35 5 43 74 64K S 1024 X 768 65 48 3 60 74 64K 1024 X 768 75 56 70 74 64K 1024 X 768 78 7 60 75 74 64K S 1024 X 768 94 5 68 3 85 75 64K S S 1280 X 1024 75 48 43 78 16M 800 x 600 36 35 2 56 78 16M S S 800 x 600 40 37 8 60 78 16M 800 x 600 50 48 1 72 78 16M E S 800 x 600 49 5 46 9 75 78 16M S 800 x 600 56 25 53 7 85 79 16M 2 i 800 x 600 44 9 35 5 43 79 16M z S 1024 x 768 65 483 60 Interlaced Mode 32K Direct Color 256 Color Mixed Mode continued 209 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Extended VGA Modes continued Colors Pixel Horiz Vert Mode s number Char x Char Freq Freq Freq in Hex palette size Row Cell Resolution MHz KHz Hz 79 16M 1024 x 768 75 56 70 79 16M 1024 x 768 78 7 60 75 79 16M 1024 x 768 94 5 68 3 85 7C 256 256K 144 x 54 8x 16 1152 x 864 94 5 63 9 70 7C 256 256K 144 x 54 8x 16 1152 x 864 108 67 5 75 7D 64K 1152 x 864 94 5
81. 06737 Figure 13 3 Drive Bay EMI Shield A EMI shield B Access holes 183 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 10 Using two screws of the appropriate size and length not supplied attach each plastic slide rail to the device 11 Get one of the EMI gaskets provided and peel the protective cover off the adhesive side of the gasket 12 Orient the gasket 5 inches back from the center front edge of the device and affix the gasket to the metal top of the device OM06738 Figure 13 4 Snap in Plastic Slide Rails A moon D F Tape drive or other device Tab Four screws two each side Slide rail Protective cover EMI gasket 13 Orient the device so that the plastic slide rails on each side of it engage with the guide rails in the bay Push the device into the bay until the slide rails lock in place 14 Connect the power cable to the device 15 For an IDE drive connect the IDE signal cable to the drive For a SCSI device connect the SCSI signal cable to the drive A CAUTION To prevent restricting airflow or blocking the fans route the signal cables through the strain relief clip attached to the back of the top 5 25 inch bay 184 16 Reinstall the snap on drive bay cover as described in Chapter 11 17 Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 18 This step is optional If you installed a SCSI CD ROM drive run the SCSISelect utility to enable BIOS support for a bootable CD R
82. 11 Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 If you leave the bay empty run the SSU to reconfigure the system For information about running this utility see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run Diskette Drive The 3 5 inch diskette drive in the 3 5 inch user accessible drive bay supports 720 KB 1 25 MB 1 44 MB and 2 88 MB media Contact your sales representative or dealer for a list of approved add in devices Removing the Diskette Drive See Figure 13 7 1 2 Oy ue Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the snap on plastic drive bay cover as described in Chapter 11 Disconnect the power and signal cables from the 3 5 inch diskette drive Remove and save the screws that secure the drive to the 3 5 inch drive bay in the chassis Slide the drive out of the bay and place it component side up on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper Replacing the Diskette Drive 186 See Figure 13 7 1 2 3 Remove the 3 5 inch diskette drive from the protective packaging and place it component side up on a nonconductive static free surface Record the model and serial numbers of the drive in your equipment log Set any jumpers or switches according to the drive manufacturer s instructions Slide the drive into
83. 144 removing 144 support panel reinstalling 142 removing 142 Memory module connector signal section 261 Messages beep codes 296 302 port 80h codes 296 302 POST error codes 299 Monitor connecting 36 O Operating systems 19 OVL files 63 P Password administrative 26 protection 30 user 26 PCI 19 210 bus master slots 162 bus slots 206 video controller 207 Peripheral devices connecting 36 floppy disk drive 49 keyboard connecting 36 monitor connecting 36 Physical specifications 34 POST description 41 47 running 41 47 Power cord length 38 obtaining 38 Power distribution backplane 22 reinstalling 176 removing 174 Power outlet 33 Power requirements 33 34 Power supply 20 configuration constraints 120 failure LED 120 fan 21 fault clearing 192 Index handles 33 hot swapping 120 indicator LEDs 119 input voltages 278 interconnect power cables 192 output voltage 278 redundant 120 removing 119 replacing 122 safety interlock mechanism 120 warning 120 Power system 20 277 nonredundant 172 redundant 172 shutdown 191 Power usage calculating 280 worksheet 280 281 Power on self test 41 47 Processor 21 installing 148 removing 148 Product type 304 R Real time clock 284 configuration settings 49 lithium battery 284 Recovery mode indicator SCSI drive 116 Regulatory specifications declaration of manufacturer 303 electromagnetic compatibilit
84. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Signal 12 V GROUND 12 V GROUND 3 3 V GROUND 3 3 V GROUND 3 3 V GROUND 3 3 V 12 V Interconnect to CPU Baseboard Signal Section 268 Signal X1CLK GND X1D_L 15 X1D_L 14 X1D_L 12 GND X1D_L 9 X1D_L 8 X1D_L 6 GND X1D_L 4 X1D_L 3 X1D_L 1 X1D_L O GND RSVD Pin A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 Signal GND X1CLKB GND X1D_L 13 GND X1D_L 10 GND X1D_L 7 GND X1D_L 5 GND X1D_L 2 GND X1XRTS_L GND RSVD Pin Signal B1 GND B2 RSVD B3 GND B4 X1XSTBN_L B5 X1BE_L 1 B6 X1D_L 11 B7 X1ADS_L B8 GND B9 X1PAR_L B10 GND B11 X1BE_L 0 B12 GND B13 X1HRTS_L B14 GND B15 RSVD B16 GND Color YELLOW BLACK YELLOW BLACK ORANGE BLACK ORANGE BLACK ORANGE BLACK ORANGE BLACK Pin C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 continued Chapter 19 Interconnect Backplane Description Connectors Interconnect to CPU Baseboard Signal Section A B amp C continued Signal RSVD RSVD ISP_SDI RSVD ISP_SDO RSVD RSVD GND XOCLK GND XOD_L 15 X0D_L 14 X0D_L 12 GND XOD_L 9 X0D_L 8 XOD_L 6 GND X0D_L 4 X0D_L 3 XOD_L 1 X0D_L 0 GND NMI_5V 12C_BMC_SDA 12C_BMC_SCL BMC_SPI_BUS 0 BMC_SPI_BUS 6 BMC_SPI_BUS 1 IO_TDO IO_TCK RSVD Pin A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 A3
85. 2 E23 E24 E25 E26 E27 E28 E29 E30 E31 E32 E33 E34 E35 E36 E37 E38 continued Chapter 19 Interconnect Backplane Description Connectors Interconnect to I O Baseboard Signal Section D amp E continued Signal Pin Signal Pin RSVD D39 X1BLK_L E39 GND D40 GND E40 RSVD D41 X1RST_L E41 GND D42 GND E42 RSVD D43 MIOC_INTREQ_L E43 GND D44 GND E44 X1XSTBP_L D45 RSVD E45 GND D46 GND E46 X1HSTBP_L D47 GND E47 X1HSTBN_L D48 GND E48 Interconnect to I O Baseboard Power Section 3 3 V Connectors J38 and J39 Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal P1A1 3 3V P1B1 GND P1C1 3 3V P1D1 GND P1E1 3 3V P1A2 3 3V P1B2 GND P1C2 3 3V P1D2 GND P1E2 3 3V P1A3 3 3V P1B3 GND P1C3 3 3V P1D3 GND P1E3 3 3V P2A1 3 3V P2B1 GND P2C1 3 3V P2D1 GND P2E1 GND P2A2 3 3V P2B2 GND P2C2 3 3V P2D2 GND P2E2 GND P2A3 3 3V P2B3 GND P2C3 3 3V P2D3 GND P2E3 GND 5 V and 12 V Connector J40 Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal P1A1 12V P1B1 GND P1C1 12V P1D1 GND P1E1 12V P1A2 12V P1B2 GND P1C2 12V P1D2 GND P1E2 12V P1A3 12V P1B3 GND P1C3 12V P1D3 GND P1E3 12V P2A1 5V P2B1 GND P2C1 5V P2D1 GND P2E1 GND P2A2 5V P2B2 GND P2C2 5V P2D2 GND P2E2 GND P2A3 5V P2B3 GND P2C3 5V P2D3 GND P2E3 GND 275 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 5 V Connectors J41 J42 J43 and J44 Pin P1A1 P1A2 P1A3 P2A1 P2A2 P2A3 Signal 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V Pin P1B1 P1B2 P1B3 P2B1 P2B2 P
86. 2 ID3 J23 ID4 J24 ID5 J25 SCSI Hot docking Backplane Connectors Chapter 15 SCSI Hot docking Backplane Description SCSI IDs cc HIV IO TVTOZZTR I IOTMOOUD S T Figure 15 1 SCSI Backplane Three fan connector for I O baseboard fans Intrusion switch connector Three fan connector for CPU baseboard fans Three fan connector for CPU baseboard fans J15 SCSI bus A drive ID 5 J14 SCSI bus A drive ID 4 J13 SCSI bus A drive ID 3 J12 SCSI bus A drive ID 2 J11 SCSI bus A drive ID 1 J10 SCSI bus A drive ID 0 J1 SCSI bus A input J2 SCSI bus B input J25 SCSI bus B drive ID 5 J24 SCSI bus B drive ID 4 J23 SCSI bus B drive ID 3 J22 SCSI bus B drive ID 2 J21 SCSI bus B drive ID 1 J20 SCSI bus B drive ID 0 12 V power connector Hot swap control connector 5 V power connector OM06753 197 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Wide Fast SCSI Input16 Bit Connectors J1 amp J2 198 Signal Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Reserved Reserved Reserved Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Connector Input Pin 4 ON OO FR Go h 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 OM06754
87. 289 checklist 289 specific problems corrective actions 291 power light 291 video display 293 Index U Unlocking front casters 35 USB ports 22 205 Utilities BIOS setup 49 FRUSDR load utility 103 SCSISelect 47 81 V Video controller 22 207 drivers installing 43 standard VGA modes 207 W Warnings 112 174 translations English 310 French 312 German 314 Italian 316 Spanish 318 vacant power supply bay 120 327
88. 293 Incorrect or no Beep Codes nn 293 Diskette Drive Activity Light Does Not Lob 294 Hard Disk Drive Activity Light Does Not Light sessssssssnernnesenernnnrssrrrrnnrrsserrrersssee 294 Problems With Application Software AE 295 Server Powers Up and Immediately Powers Down 295 Error Codes and Messages sich cent ee eure 295 POSO aoe E E er e 296 POST Error Codes and Messages AA 299 AD450NX Server System Product Guide A Regulatory Specifications Declarationsot Compliance eu ee 303 Safety COMPA CE ic Be ee een 303 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMG cisne 303 Electromagnetic Compatibility Notice UA 304 FCC Compliance Giatement ANNE 304 Electromagnetic Compatibility Notices International oooocccccnnnniccccnnnnncccccccccnnannnnnos 304 B Equipment Log EQUIP a a EE EE 305 C Warnings WARNING English ON 310 AVERTISSEMENT Frangalss r se u ner el 312 WARNUNG Deutsch 22 une ee een 314 AVVERTENZA Malla ce ee ar 316 ADVERTENCIAS Eemere miii dana 318 o a o eiserne 321 Figures 1 1 High performance Server css it 19 1 2 Server Back Left Side View 23 1 3 Server Back Right SIG MW u a ek 23 1 4 Server Controls and Indicators aaa nen en 25 1 5 Front Bezel Security Key Lock ee 27 1 6 Top and Side Covers Security Padlock nn ee 28 UE E E ee 29 2 12 SORVEN O EIE AE E a reed era 35 2 20 SOME VO Panel een eek aeg 37 2 3 Power Supplies With Safety Interlocks A 39 2 4 Server Power and Reset G
89. 2B3 Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND 3 3 V and 5 V Connector J45 276 Pin P1A1 P1A2 P1A3 P2A1 P2A2 P2A3 5V 5V 5V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V P n P1B1 P1B2 P1B3 P2B1 P2B2 P2B3 Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND Pin P1C1 P1C2 P1C3 P2C1 P2C2 P2C3 y n P1C1 P1C2 P1C3 P2C1 P2C2 P2C3 Signal 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V Signal 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V P1D1 P1D2 P1D3 P2D1 P2D2 P1D1 P1D2 P1D3 P2D1 P2D2 P2D3 Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND Pin P1E1 P1E2 P1E3 P2E1 P2E2 P2E3 Pin P1E1 P1E2 P1E3 P2E1 P2E2 P2E3 Signal 5V 5V 5V GND GND GND P2D3 Signal Signal 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V GND GND GND 3 3V 20 Power System Description Calculating Power Usage This chapter describes the modular power system and explains how to calculate power usage for your server Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 125 Power System The modular power system for the server is provided by up to four 420 watt autoranging power supplies and a power distribution backplane The power system may be configured with three power supplies standard nonredundant or four power supplies 3 1 redundant The power supplies are mounted in
90. 3 ISP_EN_L E23 ISP_MODE D24 GND E24 XOHSTBN_L D25 GND E25 XOHSTBP_L D26 GND E26 GND D27 XOCLKFB E27 XOXSTB_L D28 GND E28 GND D29 RSVD E29 XORSTB_L D30 GND E30 GND D31 XORST_L E31 XORSTFB_L D32 GND E32 GND D33 XOBLK_L E33 RSVD D34 GND E34 GND D35 FERR_L E35 RSVD D36 GND E36 GND D37 INTR_3V E37 12C_GLOBAL_SCL D38 GND E38 continued 270 Chapter 19 Interconnect Backplane Description Connectors Interconnect to CPU Baseboard Signal Section D amp E continued Signal IO_PWRGD XOIB_L GND BMC_SPI_BUS 2 GND INIT_3V_L PICD 0 IO_TRST_L RSVD RSVD Pin D39 D40 D41 D42 D43 D44 D45 D46 D47 D48 Signal CIB_INTO GND BMC_SPI_BUS 4 GND RSVD GND PICD 1 GND PIC_CLK GND Interconnect to CPU Baseboard Power Section 3 3 V Connectors J21 J22 J23 and J24 Pin P1A1 P1A2 P1A3 P2A1 P2A2 P2A3 Signal 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V Pin P1B1 P1B2 P1B3 P2B1 P2B2 P2B3 Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND 5 V Connectors J25 and J26 Pin P1A1 P1A2 P1A3 P2A1 P2A2 P2A3 Signal 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V Pin P1B1 P1B2 P1B3 P2B1 P2B2 P2B3 Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND Pin P1C1 P1C2 P1C3 P2C1 P2C2 P2C3 P1C1 P1C2 P1C3 P2C1 P2C2 P2C3 Signal 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V Signal 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V P1D1 P1D2 P1D3 P2D1 P2D2 P2D3 P1D1 P1D2 P1D3 P2D1 P2D2 P2D3 Signal GND GND GND GND
91. 3H1C J3H1C J3H1C J3H1C J3H1D J3H1D J3H1D J3H1D J3H1E J3H1E J3H1E J3H1E 1 B C 1 A B 2 B C 2 A B 3 B C 3 A B 4 B C 4 A B 5 B C 5 A B 6 B C 6 A B 7 B C Chapter 16 I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Function Reserved No jumper installed Reserved No jumper installed Permits Server Management to program onboard programmable devices Do not allow server management to program onboard programmable devices Apply 12 V power to programming pins flash memory can be updated written to Apply ground to programming pins write protects flash memory Reserved No jumper installed Reserved No jumper installed Do not clear CMOS password Clear CMOS password Do not clear CMOS Clear CMOS Normal Boot Boot recovery BIOS Reserved No jumper installed Reserved No jumper installed Disable programming of onboard In System Program ISP parts Reserved Enable programming of onboard ISP parts Reserved Reserved No jumper installed Reserved No jumper installed 215 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Restoring CMOS to Default Values The jumper on J3HIC pins 6 B C preserves the settings stored in CMOS nonvolatile memory NVRAM during server reset Moving the jumper to pins 6 A B clears CMOS and sets it and the real time clock RTC to the Setup default values during server reset To clear CMOS and restore the Setup default values 1 Observe the pre
92. 3V P1B3 GND P1C3 3 3V P1D3 GND P1E3 GND P2A1 3 3V P2B1 GND P2C1 3 3V P2D1 GND P2E1 3 3V P2A2 3 3V P2B2 GND P2C2 3 3V P2D2 GND P2E2 3 3V P2A3 3 3V P2B3 GND P2C3 3 3V P2D3 GND P2E3 3 3V 249 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 5 V Connectors J21E amp F Pin Signal Pin P1A1 5V P1B1 P1A2 5V P1B2 P1A3 5V P1B3 P2A1 5V P2B1 P2A2 5V P2B2 P2A3 5V P2B3 12 V Connector J21G Pin Signal Pin P1A1 12V P1B1 P1A2 12V P1B2 P1A3 12V P1B3 P2A1 12V P2B1 P2A2 12V P2B2 P2A3 12V P2B3 12 V Connectors J21H amp J 250 Pin P1A1 P1A2 P1A3 P2A1 P2A2 P2A3 Signal 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V Pin P1B1 P1B2 P1B3 P2B1 P2B2 P2B3 Signa GND GND GND GND GND GND Signa GND GND GND GND GND GND Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND P1C1 P1C2 P1C3 P2C1 P2C2 P2C3 P1C1 P1C2 P1C3 P2C1 P2C2 P2C3 I n P1C1 P1C2 P1C3 P2C1 P2C2 P2C3 Signal 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V Signal 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V Signal 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V P1D1 P1D2 P1D3 P2D1 P2D2 P2D3 P1D1 P1D2 P1D3 P2D1 P2D2 P2D3 P1D1 P1D2 P1D3 P2D1 P2D2 P2D3 Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND Pin P1E1 P1E2 P1E3 P2E1 P2E2 P2E3 Pin P1E1 P1E2 P1E3 P2E1 P2E2 P2E3 Pin P1E1 P1E2 P1E3 P2E1 P2E2 P2E3 Signal GND GND GND 5V 5V 5V Signal GND GND GND 12V
93. 420 watt autoranging power supplies The other three 5 25 inch bays can house mass storage devices such as tape DVD and CD ROM drives Any two adjacent 5 25 inch bays can be converted into a single full height bay A 3 5 inch bay above the 5 25 inch bays provides space for a boot hard disk drive IDE or SCSI The twelve 3 5 inch hot docking bays when fully AD450NX Server System Product Guide configured with 9 GB hard disk drives provide the server with up to 108 GB of storage However the total amount of data storage can change with higher capacity hard disk drives The hot docking bays allow hot swapping of Small Computer System Interface SCSD hard disk drives without shutting down the server The server can easily accommodate the needs of a variety of high performance applications for example network servers multiuser systems and large database operations As your application requirements increase you can upgrade your server with e More powerful processors e Additional memory e Other peripheral devices e Add in I O boards Server Features Feature Comment Power system with redundancy The 420 watt autoranging power supplies include integrated fans for cooling The server requires a minimum of three power supplies Ina server with four power supplies the fourth one is redundant The supplies can be replaced hot swapped in a redundant configuration without turning the server power off Each supply comes with a spring loade
94. 46 POCOS un nee At AE REER 148 Removing a PlOCOSSOR uta temita ri 148 Installing a Processor sec en he cere mnie ite Moe ae eee 148 DC to DC Converter VRM sio ege EENS ENENEEEE REEL RNEEN 150 Removing a DC to DC Converter VM 150 Installing a DC to DC Converter VM 150 Interconnect Backplane Assembly aa hen Re 152 Removing the Interconnect Backplane Assembly nn 152 Reinstalling the Interconnect Backplane Assembly A 154 Ee BEE 156 Removing the CPU Baseboard AAA 156 Reinstalling the CPU Baseboard uk 156 Front Panel Board cra teen 158 Removing the Front Panel Board 158 Reinstalling the Front Panel Board ante 158 Retaining Bracket for Add in Board 160 Removing the Retaining Bracket for Add in Board 160 Reinstalling the Retaining Bracket for Add in Board 160 COMBOS occ ee eebe 162 Installing an Add in BOO es 162 Removing an Add in Board centre 165 Three fan Array Assemblv AAA 166 Removing the Three fan Array Assembly e 166 Reinstalling the Three fan Array Assembiv 166 WO RISC re KEE 168 Removing the I O Riser Bald sn ea ern 168 Reinstalling the I O Riser Card nu ee 168 V O BASCDOAIG nce se 170 Removing the e EE 170 Reinstalling the I O Baseboard unn 170 SCSI Hot docking Backplane u ee steven NEEN 172 Removing the RE el EE 172 Reinstalling the SCSI Backplane sssssnnseeeeseernreesserrrnerssserrnrressrrrrerrnnnsrnnrnnnrsserennn 172 Power Distribution Backplane Are ante ee eu 174 Removing the Power D
95. 5 A36 A37 A38 A39 A40 A41 A42 A43 A44 A45 A46 A47 A48 Signal GND RSVD GND RSVD GND RSVD GND ISP_SCLK GND XOCLKB GND X0D_L 13 GND X0D_L 10 GND XOD_L 7 GND X0D_L 5 GND X0D_L 2 GND XOXRTS_L GND IGNNE_5V_L GND BMC_SPI_BUS 3 GND CPU_SPI_RESET_L GND IO_TDI GND RSVD Pin B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32 B33 B34 B35 B36 B37 B38 B39 B40 B41 B42 B43 B44 B45 B46 B47 B48 Signal RSVD GND RSVD RSVD GND RSVD GND RSVD GND RSVD GND XOXSTBN_L XOBE_L 1 XOD_L 11 XOADS_L GND XOPAR_L GND XOBE_L 0 GND XOHRTS_L GND 12C_ GLOBAL GDA SMI_3V_L BMC_SPI_BUS 5 GND PROC_RESET_L A20M_3V_L PWRGDB IO TMS RSVD GND Pin C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 C37 C38 C39 C40 C41 C42 C43 C44 C45 C46 C47 C48 269 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Interconnect to CPU Baseboard Signal Section D amp E Signal Pin Signal Pin X1HSTBN_L D1 GND E1 X1HSTBP_L D2 GND E2 GND D3 X1CLKFB E3 X1XSTBP_L D4 GND E4 GND D5 MIOC_INTREQ_L E5 X1RSTFB_L D6 GND E6 GND D7 X1RST_L E7 X1RSTB_L D8 GND E8 GND D9 X1BLK_L E9 RSVD D10 GND E10 GND D11 RSVD E11 RSVD D12 GND E12 GND D13 RSVD E13 RSVD D14 GND E14 RSVD D15 RSVD E15 X1lB_L D16 GND E16 RSVD D17 RSVD E17 RSVD D18 GND E18 GND D19 RSVD E19 RSVD D20 GND E20 RSVD D21 RSVD E21 RSVD D22 GND E22 RSVD D2
96. 5 31 5 60 11 2 256K 80x30 8x16 640 X 480 Graphics 31 5 37 9 72 11 2 256K 80x30 8x16 640 X 480 Graphics 31 5 37 5 75 12 16 256K 80x30 8x16 640 X 480 Graphics 25 31 5 60 12 16 256K 80x30 8x16 640 X 480 Graphics 31 5 37 9 72 12 16 256K 80x30 8x16 640 X 480 Graphics 31 5 37 5 75 12 16 256K 80x30 8x16 640 X 480 Graphics 35 8 43 3 85 13 256 256K 40x25 8x8 320 X 200 Graphics 12 5 31 5 70 207 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Extended VGA Modes 208 Mode s in Hex 58 6A 58 6A 58 6A 58 6A 5C 5C 5C 5C 5C 5D 5D 5D 5D 5D 5E 5F 5F 5F 5F 60 60 60 60 60 60 64 64 64 64 65 65 65 65 65 66 66 Interlaced Mode 32K Direct Color 256 Color Mixed Mode Colors number palette size 16 256K 16 256K 16 256K 16 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 16 256K 16 256K 16 256K 16 256K 16 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 64K 64K 64K 64K 64K 64K 64K 64K 64K 32K 32K Char x Row 100 x 37 100 x 37 100 x 37 100 x 37 100 x 37 100 x 37 100 x 37 100 x 37 100 x 37 128 x 48 128 x 48 128 x 48 128 x 48 128 x 48 80 x 25 80 x 30 80 x 30 80 x 30 80 x 30 128 x 48 128 x 48 128 x 48 128 x 48 128 x 48 128 x 48 Char Cell Resolution 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 1024 X 7
97. 5 inch SCA SCSI hard disk drive continued Chapter 20 Power System Description Calculating Power Usage Table 20 4 Worksheet for Calculating DC Power Usage continued Current maximum at voltage levels Device 3 3 V 5 V 12 V 12 V 3rd 3 5 inch SCA SCSI hard disk drive 4th 3 5 inch SCA SCSI hard disk drive 5th 3 5 inch SCA SCSI hard disk drive 6th 3 5 inch SCA SCSI hard disk drive 7th 3 5 inch SCA SCSI hard disk drive 8th 3 5 inch SCA SCSI hard disk drive 9th 3 5 inch SCA SCSI hard disk drive 10th 3 5 inch SCA SCSI hard disk drive 11th 3 5 inch SCA SCSI hard disk drive 12th 3 5 inch SCA SCSI hard disk drive Nine 92 mm cooling fans 31 A fan 12 V 5 36 A 595 A fan 5V Total Current lt gt NOTE The total combined wattage for your server configuration must be less than 1260 watts The power must be less than e 139 watts for 3 3 V e 450 watts for 5 V e 540 watts for 12 V e 12 watts for 12 V e 1 8 watts for 5 V standby Table 20 5 Total Combined Power Used by Your Server Voltage Level and Total Current V x A W Total Watts for Each Voltage Level 3 3 V x A WwW 5 V x A W 5 V x A WwW 12 V x A WwW 12 V x A W Total Combined Wattage W 281 21 Back up Battery Replacing Disposing This chapter tells how to replace the lithium back up battery on the I O baseboard Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers
98. 63 9 70 7D 64K 1152 x 864 94 5 67 5 75 Interlaced Mode 32K Direct Color 256 Color Mixed Mode SCSI Controllers Adaptec AIC 7880 The I O baseboard includes an Adaptec AIC 7880 wide fast 20 SCSI III Ultra SCSI single chip controller integrated as a PCI bus master The controller supports data path widths of 8 bit narrow SCSI at a data transfer rate of 20 MB sec and 16 bit wide SCSI at a data transfer rate of 40 MB sec As a 32 bit PCI bus master the controller maximizes data transfer on the PCI local bus at 133 MB sec data bursts The AIC 7880 is intended for user accessible devices such as tape drives CD ROM drives and DVD drives installed in the 5 25 inch drive bays The controller can be configured for either wide fast or ultra SCSI modes The AIC 7880 is not intended for mass storage devices However it may be used to control a single boot hard disk drive that can be installed on top of the 5 25 inch drive bays Adaptec AHA 3940AUW The AHA 3940AUW MultiChannel PCI to UltraSCSI controller is installed in one of the 32 bit PCI expansion slots on the I O baseboard The AHA 3940AUW provides a 16 bit interface between the PCI bus and the dual channel SCSI hot docking backplane Up to 12 SCSI hard disk drives can be installed in the 3 5 inch hot docking bays IDE Controller 210 The PIIX4E multifunction device on the I O baseboard acts as a PCI based Fast IDE controller that supports e PIO and IDE DMA bus master operati
99. 68 1024 X 768 1024 X 768 1024 X 768 1024 X 768 640 x 400 640 X 480 640 X 480 640 X 480 640 X 480 1024 X 768 1024 X 768 1024 X 768 1024 X 768 1024 X 768 1024 X 768 640 X 480 640 X 480 640 X 480 640 X 480 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 640 X 480 640 X 480 Pixel Freq MHz 36 40 50 49 5 36 40 50 49 5 56 25 44 9 65 75 77 78 5 25 25 31 5 31 5 36 44 9 65 75 77 78 7 94 5 25 31 5 31 5 36 36 40 50 49 5 56 25 25 31 5 Horiz Freq KHz 35 2 37 8 48 1 46 9 35 2 37 9 48 1 46 9 53 7 35 5 48 3 56 58 60 31 5 31 5 37 9 37 5 43 3 35 5 48 3 56 58 60 68 3 31 5 37 9 37 5 43 3 35 2 37 8 48 1 46 9 53 7 31 5 37 9 Vert Freq Hz 56 60 72 75 56 60 72 75 85 43 60 70 72 75 70 60 72 75 85 43 60 70 72 75 85 60 72 75 85 56 60 72 75 85 60 72 continued Chapter 16 I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Extended VGA Modes continued Colors Pixel Horiz Vert Mode s number Char x Char Freq Freq Freq in Hex palette size Row Cell Resolution MHz KHz Hz 66 32K S S 640 X 480 31 5 37 5 75 66 32K 640 X 480 36 43 3 85 67 32K 800 X 600 36 35 2 56 67 32K i S 800 X 600 40 37 8 60 67 32K 5 800 X 600 50 48 1 72 67 32K 800 X 600 49 5 46 9 75 67 32K S 800 X 600 56 25 53 7 85 68 32K S 1024 x 768 44 9 35 5 43 68 32K S S 1024 x 768 65 48 3 60 68 32K i S 1024 x 768 75 56 7
100. AD450NX Server System Product Guide Order Number 678269 002 Information in this document is provided in connection with Intel products No license express or implied by estoppel or otherwise to any intellectual property rights is granted by this document Except as provided in Intel s Terms and Conditions of Sale for such products Intel assumes no liability whatsoever and Intel disclaims any express or implied warranty relating to sale and or use of Intel products including liability or warranties relating to fitness for a particular purpose merchantability or infringement of any patent copyright or other intellectual property right Intel products are not designed intended or authorized for use in any medical life saving or life sustaining applications or for any other application in which the failure of the Intel product could create a situation where personal injury or death may occur Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time without notice No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without prior consent of Intel The AD450NX Server System may contain design defects or errors known as errata which may cause the product to deviate from published specifications Current characterized errata are available on request Copies of documents which have an ordering number and are referenced in this document or other Intel literature may be obtained from Intel Corporat
101. B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32 B33 B34 B35 Signal GND IO_TMS PWRGDB A20M_L PROC_RESET_L GND BMC_SPI_BUS 5 SMI_L 12C_GLOBAL_SDA GND XOHRTS_L GND XOBE_L 0 GND XOPAR_L GND XOADS_L XOD_L 11 XOBE_L 1 XOXSTBN_L GND ISP_HSBP_SDO GND GND GND GND GND 12C_DS2P_SDA GND Pin C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 continued Expander Bus Connector Signal Section A B amp C continued Signal X1D_L 1 X1D_L 3 X1D_L 4 GND X1D_L 6 X1D_L 8 X1D_L 9 GND X1D_L 12 X1D_L 14 X1D_L 15 GND X1CLK Pin A36 A37 A38 A39 A40 A41 A42 A43 A44 A45 A46 A47 A48 Signal X1XRTS_L GND X1D_L 2 GND X1D_L 5 GND X1D_L 7 GND X1D_L 10 GND X1D_L 13 GND Pin Signal B36 X1HRTS_L B37 GND B38 X1BE_L 0 B39 GND B40 X1PAR_L B41 GND B42 X1ADS_L B43 X1D_L 11 B44 X1BE_L 1 B45 X1XSTBN_L B46 GND B47 B48 GND Expander Bus Connector Signal Section D amp E Signal STP_CLK_L IO_TRST_L PICD 0 INIT_L GND BMC_SPI_BUS 2 GND XOIB_L IO_PWRGD 12C_GLOBAL_SCL GND RESET_HSBP_L GND GND GND GND XOXSTBP_L GND Pin D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 Signal PIC_CLK GND PICD 1 GND RESET_PWR_DIST_L GND BMC_SPI_BUS 4 GND CIB_INT
102. Board Management Controller BMC Where located on the I O baseboard What it provides temperature and voltage monitoring of the I O and CPU baseboards threshold comparison functions SMI systems management interrupt generation watchdog timer and certain GPIO general purpose input output functions fault resilient booting processor presence Voltage ID VID IERR and thermal trip monitoring server event log event time stamping sensor data record information and DIMM ID information interface current event status and sensor readings when polled by System Management Software Hot swap Controller HSC Where located on the SCSI hot docking backplane What it does implements the SAF TE command set controls the fault lights and drive power on provides a path for management information via SCSI retrieves drive fault status backplane temperature and fan failure information via the IPMB queries the status of the power distribution backplane by sending messages to the power share controller PSC via the IPMB controls drive power on and power down facilitating hot swapping monitors and communicates system fan failures controls fan voltage delivered from the power distribution backplane Chapter 16 I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers I O Riser Card The I O riser card contains all the legacy I O connections such as video keyboard mouse etc The card plugs into the legacy connector on the I O baseboa
103. C55 MD26_L A56 VCC B56 DSTBP1_L C56 GND A57 MD28_L B57 GND C57 VTT A58 VCC B58 DSTBN1_L C58 GND A59 MD31_L B59 GND C59 MD33_L A60 VCC B60 MD34_L C60 Memory Module Connector D amp E Signal Pin Signal Pin MD37_L D1 VCC E1 GND D2 MD38_L E2 MD40_L D3 VCC E3 GND D4 MD42_L E4 MD44_L D5 VCC E5 GND D6 MD47_L E6 MD49_L D7 VCC E7 GND D8 MD52_L E8 WDEVT_L D9 VCC E9 GND D10 DVALID_L E10 MD55_L D11 VCC E11 GND D12 MD57_L E12 continued 262 Chapter 18 Memory and Memory Terminator Modules Description Adding Memory Memory Module Connector Signal MD58_L GND MD62_L GND MD66_L GND MD70_L GND NC GND PWRGD GND RHIT_L GND GRCMPLT_L GND CMND1_L GND MAO_L GND MA3_L GND MA8_L GND MA13_L GND TRST_L GND TCK GND MD4_L GND MD8_L GND MD12 L GND DOFFO_L GND D amp E continued Pin D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40 D41 D42 D43 D44 D45 D46 D47 D48 D49 D50 Signal VCC MD60_L VCC MD64_L VCC MD68_L VCC VCC VCC 12C_BMC_SCL VCC 12C_BMC_SDA VCC VCC VCC BANK1_L VCC CSTB_L VCC MA2_L VCC MA6_L VCC MA11_L VCC VCC VCC TDO VCC MD2 L VCC MD6_L VCC MD10_L VCC MD15_L VCC MRESET_L Pin E13 E14 E15 E16 E17 E18 E19 E20 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E26 E27 E28 E29 E30 E31 E32 E33 E34 E35 E36 E37 E38 E39 E40 E41 E42 E43 E44 E45 E46 E47 E48 E49 E50 conti
104. Console Main Menu e File Exit Exits EMP Console e Connect Disconnect disconnects the server connection Re Connect displays the connect dialog A list of the five most recent modem connections Click on one of these server names to initiate a connection 96 Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console How to Use e Action Power On Off displays the Power on off dialog Reset displays the Reset dialog SEL Viewer displays the SEL Viewer not available on AD450NX servers SDR Viewer displays the SDR Viewer not available on AD450NX servers FRU Viewer displays the FRU Viewer Phonebook displays the Phonebook dialog e Help Help Topics help topics for EMP Console Help About provides version information Server Control Operations Three server control operations are available from the menu or toolbar in EMP Console remote server connection powering the server on and off and resetting the server The server console mode can also be switched between EMP active and BIOS redirect modes through post power up and reset options Connect When Re Connect is selected from the Connect menu the Connect dialog in Figure 7 3 is displayed This dialog allows you to connect to a server If the client machine is already connected to a server initiating connection generates a warning message The message indicates that the existing connection will be terminated if you continue
105. Ct 7880 SCSI III controller for SCSI devices such as tape CD ROM and DVD drives installed in the 5 25 inch user accessible drive bays Diskette controller that supports two drives PCl enhanced Integrated Drive Electronics IDE interface that supports two IDE buses PS 2t compatible keyboard mouse controller Two universal serial bus USB ports I O riser card This card contains all legacy I O connections it plugs into a card edge connector on the I O baseboard PS 2 compatible keyboard and mouse ports these are interchangeable PS 2 compatible parallel port Analog VGAT 15 pin video port Two PS 2 compatible 9 pin serial ports AHAT 3940AUW MultiChannelt This card is installed in one of the 32 bit PCI expansion slots on the I O PCI to UltraSCSI controller card baseboard The AHA 3940AUW provides a 16 bit interface between the PCI bus and the dual channel SCSI hot docking backplane Interconnect backplane The backplane electrically connects the I O and CPU baseboards by common fast 16 bit expander buses SCSI hot docking backplane This backplane supports hot swapping of SCA type SCSI drives mounted in carriers in and out of the hot docking bays Power distribution backplane This backplane serves as an interface between the power supplies the interconnect backplane and the SCSI hot docking backplane The power distribution backplane distributes the power load of the server among three or four 420 watt autoranging po
106. D Pin P1C1 P1C2 P1C3 P2C1 P2C2 P2C3 Pin P1C1 P1C2 P1C3 P2C1 P2C2 P2C3 Signal 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V Signal 12V 12V 12V 5V 5V 5V Pin P1D1 P1D2 P1D3 P2D1 P2D2 P2D3 Pin P1D1 P1D2 P1D3 P2D1 P2D2 P2D3 Connectors J2J1E J2J1F J2J1G and J2J1H 5 V Pin P1A1 P1A2 P1A3 P2A1 P2A2 P2A3 Connector J2J1J 3 3 and 5 V Pin P1A1 P1A2 P1A3 P2A1 P2A2 P2A3 Signal 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V Signal 5V 5V 5V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V Pin P1B1 P1B2 P1B3 P2B1 P2B2 P2B3 Pin P1B1 P1B2 P1B3 P2B1 P2B2 P2B3 Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND Pin P1C1 P1C2 P1C3 P2C1 P2C2 P2C3 P1C1 P1C2 P1C3 P2C1 P2C2 P2C3 Signal 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V Signal 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V Pin P1D1 P1D2 P1D3 P2D1 P2D2 P2D3 P1D1 P1D2 P1D3 P2D1 P2D2 P2D3 Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND Pin P1E1 P1E2 P1E3 P2E1 P2E2 P2E3 Pin P1E1 P1E2 P1E3 P2E1 P2E2 P2E3 Pin P1E1 P1E2 P1E3 P2E1 P2E2 P2E3 Pin P1E1 P1E2 P1E3 P2E1 P2E2 P2E3 Signal 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V GND GND GND Signal 12V 12V 12V GND GND GND Signal 5V 5V 5V GND GND GND Signal 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V GND GND GND 225 AD450NX Server System Produ
107. D VR_DDCDAT VR_DDCCLK 233 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Keyboard and Mouse Ports These identical PS 2 compatible ports share a common housing The top one is the mouse and the bottom one is the keyboard OM00951A Mouse Keyboard Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 MSEDAT mouse data 1 KEYDAT keyboard data 2 No connection 2 No connection 3 GND Ground 3 GND Ground 4 FUSED_VCC 5 V 4 FUSED_VCC 5 V 5 MSECLK mouse clock 5 KEYCLK keyboard clock 6 No connection 6 No connection Serial Ports These ports support external devices such as modems and scanners that require serial data transmission OM00932A Pin Signal DCD data carrier detect RXD receive data TXD transmit data DTR data terminal ready GND Ground DSR data set ready RTS request to send CTS clear to send RIA ring indicator oO DAN OA A Go M 234 Chapter 16 I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Parallel Port The IEEE 1284 compatible parallel port used primarily for a printer sends data in parallel 13 1 25 14 OM00933A Pin Pin Signal format 1 STROBE_L 2 Data bit 0 3 Data bit 1 4 Data bit 2 5 Data bit 3 6 Data bit 4 7 Data bit 5 8 Data bit 6 9 Data bit 7 10 ACK_L acknowledge 11 BUSY 12 PE paper end 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Signal AUFDXT_L auto feed ERROR_L INIT_L initialize printer SLCTIN_L select input GND Ground GND GND GND GND
108. Displaying SDR Ares ENNEN 108 Vsing SspecitiedGEGFilfaa an aaa ui an 109 Displaying Utility Title and Version nn 109 G nfiguration EEN 109 Prompting for Product Level FRU Information 44 ennnenn 109 Filtering Sensor Data Record From the SDR File 109 Updating the SDR Nonvolatile Storage Area 109 Updating FRU Nonvolatile Storage Area 109 Updating DMI Nonvolatile Storage Area 110 Gleaning UB and ExitiNd nee ee eo 110 9 Hot swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives Installing Hot Swapping Hotdocking Days sata ae ea 111 Tools and Supplies You Need ee 111 Equipment Log siciliana 111 AD450NX Server System Product Guide SGSI SEA Hard DISK Drives une eek 112 Mounting a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive in a Carrier eeesseeseseeeseerre resserre esserne 112 Installing a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive in a Hot docking Bay ccccoooccccccccnccccccnannnnos 114 Hot swapping a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 116 SCSI Drive Status LED Descriptions cccooococcccnnnccnnnncccnnnnccnnnnnccnnnnnnonannnnnos 116 10 Hot swappable Power Supplies Hot Swapping Tools and Supplies You Need acosa car en 119 Equipment Eog e eE a E E E E E antares ates 119 Hot Swapping a Power Supply ii dee AEN EEGEN 120 Removing a Power DUDO iia 120 Replacing a Power Supply ENNEN 122 Part Il Service Technician s Guide Safety Guidelines Warnings and Cautionsa uen ee an ern EEENe dee ee 125 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Warnings and Gautions sr ee Ee ag 127 Tools an
109. E A8 PP_BUSY A9 PP_ACKL A10 GND A11 PP_DR7 A12 PP_DR6 A13 PP_DR5 A14 PP_DR4 A15 GND A16 PP_DR3 A17 PP_DR2 A18 PP_DR1 A19 PP_DRO A20 GND USB Port Pin Signal Al VCC A2 DATALO A3 DATAHO A4 GND B1 VCC B2 DATAL1 B3 DATAH1 B4 GND Pin A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 A35 A36 A37 A38 A39 A40 Signal Pin PP_STB_L B1 PP_SLIN_L B2 PP_INIT_L B3 PP_ERR_L B4 PP_AFD_L B5 12C_BMC_SCL B6 DSR_TTL_FP B7 CTS_TTL_FP B8 RT_TTL_FP B9 COM2_TO STD EN B10 COM2_TO_FP_EN B11 GND B12 GND B13 GND B14 V_BLUE B15 GND B16 V_GREEN B17 GND B18 V_RED B19 GND B20 OM06248 Description Signal 5V MS_DATA MS_CLK SIN_TTL_XIMB SIN_TTL_COM2 SPO_DCD_L SP1_DCD_L SPO_SIN GND SP1_SIN SPO_RI_L SP1_RLL GND SPO_DTR_L SP1_DTR_L SPO_SOUT SP1_SOUT No connection SPO_DSR_L SP1_DSR_L Overcurrent monitor line port 0 Differential data line paired with DATAHO Differential data line paired with DATALO Ground potential Overcurrent monitor line port 1 Differential data line paired with DATAH1 Differential data line paired with DATAL1 Ground potential Pin B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32 B33 B34 B35 B36 B37 B38 B39 B40 Signal SPO_RTS_L GND SP1_RTS_L SPO_CTS_L SP1_CTS_L RTL_TTL_FP_L DTR_TTL_FP_L DCD_TTL_FP_L 12C_BMC_SDA XIMB_SOUT_EN SOUT_TTL_COM2 PWR_GOOD GND GND V_VSYNC GND V_HSYNC GN
110. E C cartridges fully seated in the slot 2 connectors on the CPU baseboard 287 AD450NX Server System Product Guide O DOODO DODDODODO a a Are front side bus terminator modules installed in all unused slot 2 connectors on the CPU baseboard Are the memory modules fully seated in the connectors on the CPU baseboard Are all DIMMs on the memory module installed correctly Chapter 18 Are all add in ISA and PCI boards fully seated in their slots on the I O baseboard Are all jumper settings on the I O and CPU baseboards correct Chapters 16 and 17 Are all jumper and switch settings on add in boards and peripheral devices correct To check settings refer to the manufacturer s documentation Ensure there are no conflicts for example two add in boards sharing the same interrupt Are all add in boards installed correctly Chapter 12 If the server has a hard disk drive is 1t properly formatted or defined Is the SCSI hot docking backplane configured correctly Chapter 15 Are all device drivers properly installed Chapter 2 Are the configuration settings made with the SSU correct Chapter 5 Is the operating system properly loaded Refer to the operating system documentation Did you press the on off power switch on the front panel to turn the server on power on LED should be lit Is the power cord plugged into the AC inlet on the power supply and into a NEMA 5 15R outlet for 100 120 V or a NEMA 6 15R out
111. E erario 53 43 53 49 2D 42 2D 54 65 72 6D 33 SCSI B Term3 Reading SDR Record 2 DE 40 10 01 30 20 00 13 05 00 10 F1 F8 04 01 05 N ee 00 00 00 20 29 00 00 1E 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 a ana see 00 FF 00 03 03 00 00 00 00 42 49 02 02 00 01 CI eee BEL Mass 46 41 4E 2D 32 FAN 2 Chapter 8 FRU and SDR Load Utility When to Run Using Specified CFG File The utility can be run with the command line parameter of cfg filename cfg The filename can be any DOS accepted eight character filename string The utility loads the specified CFG file and uses the entries in the configuration file to probe the hardware and to select the proper SDRs to load into nonvolatile storage Displaying Utility Title and Version The utility displays its title FRU amp SDR Load Utility Version 2 0 Configuration File The configuration file is in ASCII text The utility executes commands formed by the strings present in the configuration file These commands cause the utility to perform various tasks needed to ultimately load the proper SDRs into the nonvolatile storage of the BMC and possibly generic FRU devices Because some of the commands are interactive you are required to make a choice Prompting for Product Level FRU Information Through the use of a configuration file the utility may prompt the user for FRU information Filtering Sensor Data Record From the SDR File The MASTER SDR file has all the possible SDRs for the system The
112. Enter gt to see the options SCSI Device Option SCSI ID 0 No device Ifa Format Disk hard disk drive is present select it and press lt Enter gt to display the utilities Verify Disk Media SCSI ID 0 WDIGTL ENTERPRISE SCSI ID 1 thru 5 No None device SCSI ID 6 ESG SHV SCA None HSBP M4 SCSI ID 7 AHA None 3940AU AUW AUWD SCSI ID 8 thru 15 No None device Exit Menu Feature Option Comment 90 Exit Utility Yes Comment This utility performs a low level format on the hard disk drive CAUTION Back up your data before performing a low level format Once started you cannot abort it This utility scans the media of the selected device for defects If it finds bad blocks it prompts you to reassign them If you select yes the blocks will no longer be used No device present Not a disk drive This is the SCSI hot docking backplane This is the SCSI host adapter on the add in board No device present When you finish configuring your SCSI devices press lt Esc gt Then select Yes No and press lt Enter gt When this message appears Please press any key to reboot Press any key and your server will reboot 7 Emergency Management Port Console How to Use The Emergency Management Port EMP Console provides an interface to the Emergency Management Port EMP This interface allows remote server management via amodem or direct connection The server control operations available wit
113. FRU and Sensor Data Repository SDR Load Utility The baseboard supports up to four processors each processor is packaged in a Single Edge Contact S E C cartridge the baseboard supports two memory modules The cartridge includes the processor core and L2 cache components The module plugs into any unpopulated slot 2 connector on the CPU baseboard The module terminates the FSB GTL signals of the slot 2 connectors when a processor is not installed in them Each memory module supports up to 4 GB of ECC memory using sixteen 72 bit dual inline memory modules DIMMs The CPU baseboard requires two memory modules or one memory module and one memory terminator module The memory terminator module provides electrical termination for the memory bus in the event that only one memory module is in installed on the CPU baseboard continued 21 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Server Features continued Feature Comment UO baseboard One 16 bit ISA expansion slot shares a common chassis I O expansion slot with a 32 bit PCI slot you can use the shared slot for either ISA or PCI but not both Six 32 bit PCI expansion slots one of them shares a common chassis I O expansion slot with the ISA slot you can use the shared slot for either PCI or ISA but not both Five 64 bit PCI expansion slots Integrated Cirrus Logic GD5446 VisualMediat PCI super video graphics array SVGA controller with 2 MB of video memory Adaptec AI
114. GATE_L FD_TRKO_L FD_WPROT_L FD_RDATA_L FD_HDSEL_L FD_DSKCHG_L 229 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Wide Fast 16 bit SCSI Port Signal Name Conn Pin Cable Pin Cable Pin Conn Pin Signal Name GND Ground 1 1 2 35 DB12_L GND 2 3 4 36 DB13_L GND 3 5 6 37 DB14_L GND 4 7 8 38 DB15_L GND 5 9 10 39 DBP1_L GND 6 11 12 40 DBO_L GND 7 13 14 41 DB1_L GND 8 15 16 42 DB2_L GND 9 17 18 43 DB3_L GND 10 19 20 44 DB4_L GND 11 21 22 45 DB5_L GND 12 23 24 46 DB6_L GND 13 25 26 47 DB7_L GND 14 27 28 48 DBP_L GND 15 29 30 49 GND GND 16 31 32 50 GND TERMPWR 17 33 34 51 TERMPWR TERMPWR 18 35 36 52 TERMPWR RESERVED 19 37 38 53 RESERVED GND 20 39 40 54 GND GND 21 41 42 55 ATN_L GND 22 43 44 56 GND GND 23 45 46 57 BSY_L GND 24 47 48 58 ACK_L GND 25 49 50 59 RST_L GND 26 51 52 60 MSG_L GND 27 53 54 61 SEL_L GND 28 55 56 62 C D_L GND 29 57 58 63 REQ_L GND 30 59 60 64 VO_L GND 31 61 62 65 DB8_L GND 32 63 64 66 DB9_L GND 33 65 66 67 DB10_L GND 34 67 68 68 DB11_L 230 IDE Port Pin Ni aw o 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 Signal RSTDRV DD7 DD6 DD5 DD4 DD3 DD2 DD1 DDO GND DRQ DIOW DIOR IORDY DACK IRQ DA1 DAO CS1P_L DHACT_L Chapter 16 I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Pin 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 Signal GND Ground DD8 DD9 DD10 DD11 DD12 DD13 DD14 DD15 KEY PIN GND GND GND CSEL GND No con
115. Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the air baffle as described earlier Remove the two three fan array assemblies as described earlier Disconnect two signal cables one from the LCD one from the I O baseboard and one two wire power cable from the front panel board Remove the three screws and unsnap the board from the snap on standoffs Save the screws Place the board on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper Reinstalling the Front Panel Board 158 See Figure 12 14 1 2 RER Position the front panel board over the snap on and threaded standoffs on the front bulkhead of the chassis Press the board onto the snap on standoffs and insert the screws loosely into the threaded standoffs Make sure the board is properly seated and tighten all screws firmly 8 0 inch pounds Connect the two signal cables and the two wire power cable to the front panel board Reinstall the two three fan array assemblies as described earlier Reinstall the air baffle as described earlier Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling AN OM06722 Figure 12 14 Front Panel Board A moon LCD two wire cable Screws three LCD data cable Snap on standoffs two Front panel to I
116. I Card Bus 00 dev 0B Ethernet Controller PCI Card Bus 00 dev OC VGA Controller PCI Card Bus 00 dev OF Multifunction Controller PCI Card Bus 00 dev 10 Host Processor Bridge PCI Card Bus 00 dev 12 Host Processor Bridge PCI Card Bus 00 dev 13 Host Processor Bridge PCI Card Bus 00 dev 14 Host Processor Bridge PCI Card Bus 01 dev 09 Interrupt Controller 3 To configure a device select its name in the Devices section of the RCA window and press the spacebar or lt Enter gt or double click on the name 4 Itis possible to close the RCA window and return to the AF by clicking on the Back to AF button Any changes made will be kept in memory for use by the RCA when it is rerun 5 Save all the changes made by clicking on the Save button Saving writes your current configuration to nonvolatile storage where it will be available to the system after every reboot 6 Closing the window by clicking on the system menu the dash in the upper left corner discards all changes Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run System Setup Utility System Setup uta Tel Resource Configuration Add in ggi E Host Processor Bridge SCSI Controller Ethernet Controller Multifunction Controller YGA Controller Define ISA Card Add ISA Card Figure 5 2 RCA Window 69 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Defining an ISA Card 70 An ISA card usually comes with a vendor created CFG file that specifies the
117. O GND INTR GND FERR_L GND XOBLK_L GND XORST_L GND GND GND Pin E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 E15 E16 E17 E18 E19 E20 E21 E22 Chapter 16 I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Pin C36 C37 C38 C39 C40 C41 C42 C43 C44 C45 C46 C47 C48 continued 223 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Expander Bus Connector Signal Section D amp E continued Signal Pin Signal Pin XOHSTBP_L D23 GND E23 XOHSTBN_L D24 GND E24 ISP_MODE D25 ISP_EN_L E25 D26 GND E26 D27 12V E27 12V D28 GND E28 ISP_EN2_L D29 CPU_SLP_L E29 GND D30 GND E30 D31 E31 D32 GND E32 X1IB_L D33 PWR_GOOD E33 PS_PWR_ON D34 GND E34 D35 E35 GND D36 GND E36 D37 E37 GND D38 GND E38 D39 X1BLK_L E39 GND D40 GND E40 D41 X1RST_L E41 GND D42 GND E42 D43 MIOC_INTREQ_L E43 GND D44 GND E44 X1XSTBP_L D45 E45 GND D46 GND E46 X1HSTBP_L D47 GND E47 X1HSTBN_L D48 GND E48 224 Expander Bus Connector Power Section Chapter 16 I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Connectors J2J1B and J2J1C 3 3 V Pin P1A1 P1A2 P1A3 P2A1 P2A2 P2A3 Connector J2J1D 5 V and 12 V Pin P1A1 P1A2 P1A3 P2A1 P2A2 P2A3 Signal 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V Signal 12V 12V 12V 5V 5V 5V Pin P1B1 P1B2 P1B3 P2B1 P2B2 P2B3 Pin P1B1 P1B2 P1B3 P2B1 P2B2 P2B3 Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND Signal GND GND GND GND GND GN
118. OM Run the SSU or Setup to specify that the CD ROM is the boot device For information about running these utilities see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run and Chapter 4 Setup Utility When to Run Chapter 13 Boot Drives and Removable Media Drives Installing Removing Replacing OM06739 Figure 13 5 Mass Storage Device A Tape drive or other device B IDE or SCSI signal cable C Power cable OM08273 Figure 13 6 Strain Relief Clips 185 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Removing a Mass Storage Device See Figures 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 and 13 6 1 2 BD 10 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the snap on plastic drive bay cover as described in Chapter 11 Disconnect the power and the signal cables from the device Squeeze the tabs on the plastic snap in slide rails toward the device to release it Pull the device out of the bay and place it component side up on an antistatic surface Remove and save the four screws and the two slide rails from the device If you leave the bay empty for proper cooling and airflow you must install a stainless steel EMI shield on the bay and a filler panel on the snap on plastic drive bay cover Reinstall the snap on plastic drive bay cover as described in Chapter
119. PU baseboard or one memory module and one memory terminator module to properly terminate the memory bus The memory terminator module provides electrical termination for the memory bus when only one memory module is in installed However if you install two memory modules only one of them must be populated with DIMMs ECC memory detects and corrects single bit errors from DRAM in real time allowing your server to function normally despite data transmission errors ECC detects all double bit errors but does not correct them it also detects but does not correct three bit and four bit adjacent errors in a DRAM nibble Single bit errors are reported down to the exact bit within DIMM Multiple bit errors are reported down to an interleave which corresponds to a single DIMM 251 AD450NX Server System Product Guide EDO DRAM Array 252 The extended data out EDO DRAM array on the memory module consists of sixteen 72 bit 64 bit data plus 8 ECC bits DIMM sockets They are divided into four memory banks A D of four sockets each These banks support only 4 1 interleaving DIMMs in all four sockets For example in bank A socket e Jl contains interleave 0 e J2 contains interleave 1 e J3 contains interleave 2 e J4 contains interleave 3 Because each interleave provides access to 72 bits of data 4 1 interleaving yields 288 bits 32 bytes per DRAM transaction one cache line for the processor If the CPU baseboard contains two 4 1 interle
120. Running Power on Self Test A WARNING The push button on off power switch on the front panel of the server does not turn off the AC power To remove AC power from the server you must unplug each AC power cord from each power supply or wall outlet Each time you turn on the server the power LED on the front panel turns on and POST starts running It checks the I O baseboard CPU baseboard keyboard and most installed peripheral devices During the memory test POST displays the amount of memory that it is able to access and test Depending on the amount of memory installed on the memory module it may take several minutes to complete the memory test Turn on your video monitor and server After a few seconds the power on self test POST begins You can enter Setup when POST displays this message Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP If you press lt F2 gt follow the instructions on the monitor when Setup appears gt NOTE Because POST must complete test and initialization functions after pressing lt F2 gt a few seconds may pass before entering Setup If you do not press lt F2 gt POST continues During bootup the server first recognizes and displays the BIOS banner for the AIC 7880 SCSI host adapter on the I O baseboard Next the server recognizes and displays the BIOS banner for the AHA 3940AUW SCSI host adapter on the add in board plugged into a 32 bit PCI slot on the I O baseboard When the BIOS banner for each
121. SCSI boot hard disk drive and removable media drives Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 125 Tools and Supplies You Need e Phillips cross head screwdriver 1 bit and 2 bit e EMI gasket e Small flat bladed screwdriver e Antistatic wrist strap recommended e Pen or pencil Equipment Log Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B Equipment Log to record the model and serial numbers of the server all installed options and any other pertinent information about the server You will need this information when running the SSU 179 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Boot Hard Disk Drive The 3 5 inch boot drive bay located inside the chassis above the 5 25 inch bays provides space for a 1 inch by 3 5 inch wide SCSI or IDE boot hard disk drive Contact your sales representative or dealer for a list of approved add in devices Installing the Boot Hard Disk Drive See Figure 13 1 1 2 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Remove the 3 5 inch hard disk drive IDE or SCSI from the protective packaging and place it on a nonconductive static free surface Record the model and serial numbers of the drive in your equipment log Set any jumpers and switches according to the drive manufacturer s instructions If
122. SSU If you set both passwords entering either password lets you boot the server or enable the keyboard and mouse Only the administrative password lets you change the server configuration with the flash resident Setup utility Secure Boot Mode The secure boot mode allows the server to boot and run the operating system OS However you cannot use either the keyboard or the mouse until you enter the user password You can use Setup to put the server in the secure boot mode Ifthe BIOS detects a disk in the CD ROM drive or a diskette in drive A at boot time it prompts you for a password When you enter the password the server boots from the disk in the CD ROM drive or the diskette in drive A Entering a password also disables the secure mode If there is no disk in the CD ROM drive or diskette in drive A the server boots from drive C It automatically goes into secure mode All enabled secure mode features go into effect at boot time If you set a hot key combination you can secure the server immediately Boot Sequence Control The BIOS security features determine the boot devices and the boot sequence They also control disabling writes to the diskette drive in secure mode You can use the SSU to select each boot device The default boot sequence is diskette hard disk CD ROM and Network Boot Without Keyboard The server can boot with or without a keyboard Before it boots the BIOS displays a message about the keyboard stating whet
123. ST completes tests and initialization functions When the F2 prompt disappears pressing F2 will have no effect When Setup is entered the Main Menu options page is displayed Use the following keys to navigate through the menus and submenus Press F1 ESC 7 L e gt Enter F9 F10 To Get help about an item Go back to a previous item Select the previous value in a menu option list Select the next value in a menu option list Select a major menu Change the value of the current menu item to the previous value Change the value of the current menu item to the next value Activate submenus select feature options and change feature values Display the following message Setup Confirmation Load default configuration now Yes No The Yes button will be highlighted If you press lt Enter gt all Setup fields return to their default values If you press lt ESC gt or select No the server returns to the configuration it had before you pressed lt F9 gt without affecting any existing field values Display the following message Setup Confirmation Save configuration changes and exit now Yes No The Yes button will be highlighted If you press lt Enter gt all current Setup values are saved and the system is reset If you press lt ESC gt or select No the server returns to the configuration it had before you pressed lt F10 gt without affecting any existing values Main Menu Chapter 4 Setup Utility
124. Server Power and Reset Switches Front panel LCD NMI switch Power LED green Power fault LED yellow Cooling fault LED yellow Drive fault LED yellow Power switch Reset switch zo onmooau gt 40 Chapter 2 On site Installation Installing the Server Power on Self Test Each time you turn on the server the power LED on the front panel turns on and the power on self test POST starts running POST checks the I O system board processor system board keyboard and most installed peripheral devices During the memory test POST displays the amount of memory that it is able to access and test Depending on the amount of memory installed on each memory board the test may take several minutes These screen prompts and messages appear after the memory test Mouse initialized Keboard detected Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP Do NOT press lt F2 gt The above message remains for a few seconds and POST continues The server beeps once and this message appears Operating system not found Go to Booting From the Server Configuration Software CD on page 42 41 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Booting From the Server Configuration Software CD A CAUTION The Server Configuration Software CD contains only a limited operating system This limited operating system provides enough function to let you boot from the CD and copy and use the utility and manual files from the CD But this limited OS is NOT int
125. Setup Utility BE File Preferences Help Topics Tasks Available Tasks Task Description The RCA provides support to configure system MBA resources such as memory I O ports and DMA channels It also allows the reservation Boot Devices PHA Security of resources for legacy SEL ISA adapters and SEL Manager interrupt configuration PCI adapters Preferences Color Language System Setup Utility Figure 5 1 System Setup Utility Main Window 67 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Resource Configuration Add in RCA Window The RCA provides three major functions e Creates representations of devices that cannot be discovered by the system ISA cards e Modifies the contents of the system by adding and removing devices e Modifies the resources used by devices You can use the RCA window to define an ISA card or add an ISA card by clicking on the appropriate button Removing an ISA card requires that the card be highlighted in the Devices section of the screen before clicking on the button amp NOTE 68 You can only add as many ISA cards as you have available ISA slots in the server 1 From the SSU main window launch the RCA by selecting the Resources task under the RCA heading in the task box 2 When the RCA window appears it displays messages similar to the following Baseboard System Board PCI Card Bus 00 dev 09 Multifunction Controller PCI Card Bus 00 dev OA SCSI Controller PC
126. Supply Output Ratings Three Supplies Four Supplies Power Supply Outputs Individual Supply Nonredundant Redundant 5V 32A 90A 90A 12V 16A 45A 45A 3 3 V 15A 42A 42 A 12V 1A 1A 1A 5 V Standby 100 mA 360 mA 360 mA Forced load sharing is for 5 3 3 and 12 V only The 5 V standby load sharing is the technique for passive load sharing Chapter 20 Power System Description Calculating Power Usage Server Current Usage Table 20 3 shows the current usage for both minimally and fully configured servers You can easily calculate power usage in the server from the numbers provided The table is for reference only It is not meant to provide the exact current usage in the server lt gt NOTE The current usage will vary depending on the number of processors the size and number of DIMMs and any other PCI and peripheral devices installed in your server Table 20 3 Server Board Set Voltages and Currents 3 3 V 5 V 12 V 5 V Standby 12 V Min Max 2 Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Current Current Current Current Current Current Current Current Current Current CPU baseboard with 4 6A 4 64 0 8A 6 24 0 2A 28 5A OA OA OA OA processors DRAM 8 GB 24A 27 2A OA OA OA OA OA OA OA OA Total CPU 7 0A 31 8A 0 8A 6 2A 0 2A 28 5A OA OA OA OA baseboard I O baseboard 0 2A 5A 0 7A 4 25A OA OA 5mA 5mA OA OA PCI ISA 5 67 OA 23A OA 41A OA 12A OA OmA OA 1 2A WO riser card OA DA DA 70 mA DA 25 mA 5mA 150 mA OA OA Fr
127. The processor core and L2 cache components are mounted inside the S E C cartridge It plugs into one of the four slot 2 connectors on the CPU baseboard Memory Interface The memory subsystem consists of two memory modules or one memory module and one memory terminator module installed in the two memory connectors on the CPU baseboard Each memory module contains sixteen 72 bit wide DIMM sockets that can provide up to 4 GB of EDO memory per board The memory bus uses assisted gunning transceiver logic AGTL signaling technology Because the bus must be terminated on each end both memory connectors must contain memory modules or a memory module in one and a memory terminator module in the other to properly terminate the bus The orientation of the second memory connector is reversed with respect to the first one to shorten the length of the address control bus to the memory module As a result the component side of the first memory module faces toward the bottom processor The component side of the second memory module faces toward the bottom of the chassis DC to DC Voltage Converters The plug in VRM8 3 DC to DC converters on the CPU baseboard supply voltage for the processors and the L2 caches All the converters convert off the 12 V supply rail e Four converters supply voltage for the four processor cores e Two converters supply voltage for the four processor L2 caches two L2 caches share one converter An onboard switching
128. V A5 SD4 B6 DRQ2 A6 SD3 B7 12 V A7 SD2 B8 SRDY_L A8 SD1 B9 12 V A9 SDO B10 GND A10 IOCHRDY B11 SMEMW_L A11 AEN B12 SMEMR_L A12 SA19 B13 IOW_L A13 SA18 B14 IOR_L A14 SA17 B15 DACK3_L A15 SA16 B16 DRQ3 A16 SA15 B17 DACK1_L A17 SA14 B18 DRQ1 A18 SA13 B19 REFRESH_L A19 SA12 B20 BCLK A20 SA11 B21 IRQ7 A21 SA10 B22 IRQ6 A22 SA9 B23 IRQ5 A23 SA8 B24 IRQ4 A24 SA7 B25 IRQ3 A25 SA6 B26 DACK2_L A26 SA5 B27 TC A27 SA4 B28 BALE A28 SA3 B29 5 V A29 SA2 B30 OSC 14 MHz A30 SA1 B31 GND A31 SAO Key Key D1 MEMCS16_L C1 SBHE_L D2 IOCS16_L C2 LA23 D3 IRQ10 C3 LA22 continued 228 Chapter 16 I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers ISA Connector continued Pin D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 Signal IRQ11 IRQ12 IRQ15 IRQ14D DACKO_L DRQO DACK5_L DRQ5 DACK6_L DRQ6 DACK7_L DRQ7 5 V MASTER16_L GND Diskette Drive Port Pin Ni aw Kei 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 Name GND Ground GND Key GND GND GND GND GND FD_MSEN1 GND GND GND GND FD_MSENO GND GND GND Pin C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 c9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 Pin 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 Signal LA21 LA20 LA19 LA18 LA17 MEMR_L MEMW_L SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11 SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 Name FD_DENSEL No Connection FD_DRATEO FD_INDEX_L FD_MTRO_L FD_DR1_L FD_DRO_L FD_MTR1_L FD_DIR_L FD_STEP_L FD_WDATA_L FD_W
129. V SCSI hot docking backplane 5A 12 V 240 VA SCSI hot docking backplane 34 5 A Total 5 V 240 VA SCSI hot docking backplane 22 A 240 VA Protection For safety reasons the exposed power circuits are limited to 240 VA Because power for the hard disk drive is exposed on the hot docking backplane 240 VA limited 5 V and 12 V sources are required If the set point of 240 VA is exceeded the current sensing feature will shut down the entire power system In case of a 240 VA shutdown all DC voltages are shut down except 5 V standby and VBIAS They remain down until AC power to the server is cycled To remove AC power from the server you must unplug each power cord from each power supply or wall outlet 191 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Two speed Fan Voltage The low voltage setting allows the fans to run at a slower speed to minimize acoustic noise under normal conditions When the hot docking backplane senses a fan failure the voltage is set to high to increase the speed of the fans For example when the fan speed drops below 2300 RPMs on the CPU baseboard side of the chassis or 2200 RPMs on the I O baseboard side of the chassis the voltage for the fans goes high Fan speed monitoring and high low voltage control is done by the hot docking backplane microcontroller The power distribution backplane responds to the hot docking backplane microcontroller by providing the appropriate voltage to the fans GC Bus The private DC bus m
130. _L 59 A14 3 3V B14 DSTBP_L 3 C14 GND A15 MD_L 61 B15 GND C15 MD_L 63 A16 3 3V B16 DSTBN_L 3 C16 GND A17 MD_L 65 B17 GND C17 1 5V A18 3 3V B18 MD_L 67 C18 GND A19 MD_L 69 B19 GND C19 MD_L 71 A20 3 3V B20 3 3V C20 GND A21 NC B21 GND C21 3 3V A22 3 3V B22 CARD_NUM 2 C22 GND A23 GND B23 1 5V C23 SDRAM A B _ CLK A24 GND B24 PHIT A B L C24 GND A25 GND B25 1 5V C25 1 5V A26 3 3V B26 RCMPLT A B _L C26 GND A27 CARD 0 1 _L B27 GND C27 CMNDO_L A28 3 3V B28 BANKO_L C28 GND A29 BANK2_L B29 GND C29 GDCMPLT_L A30 3 3V B30 ROW_L C30 GND A31 GND B31 1 5V C31 RCGCLKO A B A32 GND B32 MA_L 1 C32 GND A33 GND B33 1 5V C33 MA_L 4 A34 3 3V B34 MA_L 5 C34 GND A35 MA_L 7 B35 GND C35 continued 243 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 244 Memory Connectors J18 and J19 Signal Power and Ground A B amp C continued Signal MA_L 9 GND 1 5V GND RCGCLK1 A B GND MD_L 0 GND MD_L 5 GND MD_L 9 GND MD_L 13 GND MD_L 16 GND MUXCLKO A B GND MD_L 21 GND MD_L 26 GND 1 5V GND MD_L 33 Pin A36 A37 A38 A39 A40 A41 A42 A43 A44 A45 A46 A47 A48 A49 A50 A51 A52 A53 A54 A55 A56 A57 A58 A59 A60 Signal 3 3V MA_L 12 3 3V GND GND GND 3 3V MD_L 3 3 3V MD_L 7 3 3V MD_L 11 3 3V DOFF1_L 3 3V GND GND GND 3 3V MD_L 24 3 3V MD_L 28 3 3V MD_L 31 3 3V Pin B36 B37 B38 B39 B40 B41 B42 B43 B44 B45 B46 B47 B48 B49 B50 B51 B52 B53 B54
131. _L 8 D35 3 3V E35 GND D36 MA_L 11 E36 MA_L 13 D37 3 3V E37 GND D38 3 3V E38 MEM A B _TRST_L D39 3 3V E39 GND D40 MEMB_TDI IO_TDI E40 MEM A B _TCK D41 3 3V E41 GND D42 MD_L 2 E42 MD_L 4 D43 3 3V E43 GND D44 MD_L 6 E44 MD_L 8 D45 3 3V E45 GND D46 MD_L 10 E46 MD_L 12 D47 3 3V E47 GND D48 MD_L 15 E48 DOFFO_L D49 3 3V E49 GND D50 MRESET_L E50 continued 245 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 246 Memory Connectors J18 and J19 Signal Power and Ground D amp E continued Signal MD_L 17 GND MD_L 20 GND MD_L 25 GND MD_L 29 GND MD_L 32 GND Pin D51 D52 D53 D54 D55 D56 D57 D58 D59 D60 Signal 3 3V MD_L 19 3 3V MD_L 23 3 3V MD_L 27 3 3V MD_L 30 3 3V MD_L 35 Pin E51 E52 E53 E54 E55 E56 E57 E58 E59 E60 Chapter 17 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Expander Bus Connector Signal Section Signal X1CLK GND X1D_L 15 X1D_L 14 X1D_L 12 GND X1D_L 9 X1D_L 8 X1D_L 6 GND X1D_L 4 X1D_L 3 X1D_L 1 X1D_L 0 GND RSVD RSVD RSVD ISP_SDI RSVD ISP_SDO RSVD RSVD GND XOCLK GND X0D_L 15 X0D_L 14 X0D_L 12 GND XOD_L 9 X0D_L 8 X0D_L 6 GND X0D_L 4 X0D_L 3 XOD_L 1 X0D_L 0 Pin A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 A35 A36 A37 A38 Signal GND X1CLKB GND
132. a of the BIOS language section of the BIOS Recording the Current BIOS Settings Before updating the BIOS record your current BIOS settings You will need them to configure your server at the end of the update procedure 1 Turn on your video monitor and your server Each time you turn on or reboot your server POST begins and after a few seconds displays this message Press lt F2 gt to enter Setup After pressing F2 a few seconds may pass before entering Setup while POST completes tests and initialization functions When Setup is entered write down the current settings Creating the BIOS Update Diskette The BIOS update file is acompressed self extracting archive that contains the files you need to update the BIOS 1 Copy the BIOS update file to a temporary directory on your hard disk 2 From the C prompt change to the temporary directory 3 To extract the file type the name of the BIOS update file for example type 10006B11 EXE and press lt Enter gt The extracted files include e LICENSE TXT Software license agreement e README TXT instructions for the BIOS update e BIOINSTR TXT instructions for creating a bootable diskette e B10S EXE BIOS update software 4 Insert the bootable diskette into drive A 5 Change to the temporary directory that holds the B10s exe file 6 Type Bros a and press lt Enter gt to extract the BIOs EXE file to the diskett
133. ado de fuentes de vibraci n e Aislado de campos electromagn ticos fuertes producidos por dispositivos el ctricos e En regiones con frecuentes tormentas el ctricas se recomienda conectar su sistema a un eliminador de sobrevoltage y desconectar el m dem de las l neas de telecomunicaci n durante las tormentas e Provisto de una toma de tierra correctamente instalada e Provisto de espacio suficiente como para acceder a los cables de alimentaci n ya que stos hacen de medio principal de desconexi n del sistema 319 Index A Acoustic noise 34 Add in boards 162 current limitations 162 installing 162 ISA 63 162 164 installing 164 PCI 63 162 164 removing 165 Agency certification 304 Alarm switches 29 B Back panel external connectors 37 Backplanes interconnect 265 power distribution 191 SCSI hot docking 195 Battery handling cautions 284 replacing 285 BIOS setup utility 49 description 49 running 49 special recovery mode 218 Board management controller 212 Board set CPU baseboard 19 front side bus terminator module 19 I O baseboard 19 I O riser card 19 interconnect backplane 19 memory module 19 voltages and currents 279 Boot hard disk drive IDE 180 installing 180 location 181 removing 180 SCSI 180 C Casters 35 Cautions 148 162 170 CD ROM drive activity LED 24 headphone jack 24 open close button 24 volume control 24 CE ma
134. alling ANNAN OM06733 Figure 12 23 Power Distribution Backplane A Screws two B Power distribution backplane C Power supplies 175 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Reinstalling the Power Distribution Backplane See Figure 12 23 1 2 Position the power backplane in the space between the SCSI backplane and the power supply bays Slide the power backplane toward the power supply bays to engage the tabs in the chassis slots Reinstall the screws and tighten them firmly 8 0 inch pounds Connect the signal cable and the two power cables of the SCSI backplane to the power backplane Connect the signal cable and the three power cables of the interconnect backplane to the power backplane Connect the signal cable and the two power cables of the redundant power supply bracket to the power backplane Connect the daisy chained power cable for the drives in the 5 25 and 3 5 inch drive bays to the power backplane Reinstall the power supplies Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Intelligent Chassis Management Bus ICMB Board Removing the ICMB Board See Figure 12 24 1 2 IB po Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the air baffle as described earlier Disconnect the ICMB signal cable from connector J1 on th
135. also interfaces with the CPU baseboard through the interconnect backplane The I O baseboard provides three functionally independent PCI buses 32 bit primary PCI bus 32 bit secondary PCI bus 64 bit PCI bus integrated Adaptec AIC 7880 SCSI controller user accessible devices only for example DVD tape and CD ROM drives integrated IDE controller that supports two IDE buses onboard video serial parallel and universal serial bus USB ports user accessible expansion slots two 32 bit primary PCI bus slots one of them is shared with the ISA slot four 32 bit secondary PCI bus slots five 64 bit PCI bus slots one 16 bit ISA bus slot shared with one of the 32 bit primary PCI bus slots PC server management interface Expander bus interface connector 205 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 32 bit PCI Expansion Slots Six 32 bit PCI bus master slots two primary and four secondary on the I O baseboard provide expansion enhancement One 32 bit primary slot shares a common chassis expansion slot with the ISA slot you can use the shared slot for either PCI or ISA but not both The PCI bus operates at 33 MHz and provides e 32 bit memory addressing e 43 3 V and 5 V power environments e burst transfers of up to 133 MB sec e H 16 or 32 bit data transfers e plug and play configuration e hierarchical bus to maximize connectivity gt NOTE Add in video boards must be installed in the 32 bit prima
136. ar aside 7 Simultaneously rotate the eject insert levers of the processor cartridge outward about 50 to eject the cartridge out of the slot 2 connector on the CPU baseboard 8 Slide the cartridge out of the slot guides and place it heat sink side up on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper A CAUTION If a slot 2 connector is depopulated a terminator module must be installed in the connector to properly terminate the signals on the FSB Installing a Processor See Figure 12 8 1 2 148 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the air baffle as described earlier Remove the processor cartridge or terminator module as described earlier Being careful not to touch the gold edge connector on the processor cartridge remove it from the protective wrapper Place the cartridge heat sink side up on a nonconductive static free surface Record the serial number of the cartridge in your equipment log 10 11 12 13 Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling Grasp the cartridge by the eject insert levers and carefully slide it into the slot guides until the levers engage with the flanges in the front sides of the guides Simultaneously rotate the levers inward until they are flush with the edge of the cartridge to seat the cartrid
137. ard and mouse after a specified time out period 1 to 120 minutes e Set an administrative password e Set a user password e Activate the secure mode hot key e Disable writing to the diskette drive Chapter 1 Introduction to the High performance Server Front Bezel Key Lock Features The two position lock in the front panel bezel lets you lock and unlock the server doors e Door 1 provides access to the drives in the 3 5 and 5 25 inch bays and the reset power on off and NMI switches e Doors 2 and 3 provide access to the hot swappable drives in the 3 5 inch hot docking bays OM06198 Figure 1 5 Front Bezel Security Key Lock A Not used B Locked position C Unlocked position 27 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Back of Chassis Padlock A padlock not provided can be inserted through the metal loop on the back of the chassis to prevent access to the CPU and I O baseboard areas of the server The mechanical design of the top and side covers allows one padlock to secure all three of them The top cover must be removed before the side covers can be removed ca a a OQOOOOOOOOO00000000000 COOC EN
138. arf nur durch denselben oder einen entsprechenden vom Hersteller empfohlenen Batterietyp ersetzt werden Entsorgen Sie verbrauchte Batterien den Anweisungen des Herstellers entsprechend Das System wurde f r den Betrieb in einer normalen B roumgebung entwickelt Der Standort sollte e sauber und staubfrei sein Hausstaub ausgenommen e gut gel ftet und keinen Heizquellen ausgesetzt sein einschlie lich direkter Sonneneinstrahlung e keinen Ersch tterungen ausgesetzt sein e keine starken von elektrischen Ger ten erzeugten elektromagnetischen Felder aufweisen e in Regionen in denen elektrische St rme auftreten mit einem berspannungsschutzger t verbunden sein w hrend eines elektrischen Sturms sollte keine Verbindung der Telekommunikationsleitungen mit dem Modem bestehen e mit einer geerdeten Wechselstromsteckdose ausger stet sein e Uber ausreichend Platz verf gen um Zugang zu den Netzkabeln zu gew hrleisten da der Stromanschlu des Produkts haupts chlich ber die Kabel unterbrochen wird 315 AD450NX Server System Product Guide AVVERTENZA Italiano 316 Rivolgersi ad un tecnico specializzato per la riparazione dei componenti dell alimentazione di questo prodotto E possibile che il prodotto disponga di pi fonti di alimentazione Non modificare o utilizzare il cavo di alimentazione in c a fornito dal produttore se non corrisponde esattament
139. ate the entry in the phonebook Delete lets you delete an entry from the Phonebook You must first select an existing server from the Server dropdown list box before selecting this option You must click Save for the entry to be deleted e Save saves a new or modified Phonebook entry or deletes an entry if the Delete radio button is selected e Connect displays the Connect dialog with the server from the Phonebook s Server dropdown list box already populating the Connect dialog s Server field e Cancel exits the Connect dialog without taking any action e Help displays the help information for this dialog Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console How to Use FRU Viewer The FRU Viewer allows you to view the server s FRU Field Replaceable Unit data from the server s Front Panel FRU information area The options available in the FRU Viewer are View all FRU records View FRU summary info Set FRU display mode to either Hex or verbose mode Close the FRU Viewer Exit EMP Console FRU Viewer Menu Options The following menu options are found on the FRU Viewer menu bar File Close closes the FRU Viewer Exit exits EMP Console View Display all Records displays all FRU data which consists of chassis board and product information FRU Info displays the FRU summary information as returned by the server Settings lets you change operating parameters for the FRU Viewer This menu displays the
140. ation Type 3 9 bytes Manufacturer Intel Type Main Server Chassis Version ASDK128M1P2MBPP Serial Number 200418630 Asset Tag Displaying FRU Area 106 The FRU area is displayed in ASCII format when the field is ASCII or as a number when the field is anumber Each FRU area displayed is headed with the FRU area designated name Each field has a field name header followed by the field in ASCII or as a number The Board Chassis and Product FRU areas end with an END OF FIELDS CODE that indicates there is no more data in this area The Internal Use area is displayed in hex format 16 bytes per line Chapter 8 FRU and SDR Load Utility When to Run Example To display the FRU area type frusdr d fru and press lt Enter gt A message similar to the following appears Common Header Area Version 1 Length 8 Header Area Version 01h Internal Area Offset 01h Chassis Area Offset 0Ah Board Area Offset OEh Product Area Offset 16h PAD 00h PAD 00h CHECKSUM DOh Internal Information Area Version 0 Length 72 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Chassis Information Area Version 1 Length 32 Chassis Type 11h Part Number ASCII ASDK128M1P2MBPP Serial Number ASCII 200418630 END OF FIELDS CODE
141. ation Jumpers 240 Changing a Jumper Setting Re 241 CPU Baseboard Layos erreichen 242 GPU Baseboard DIM ee 243 Memory Connectors J18 and J19 Signal Power and Ground 00 243 Expander Bus Connector Signal Section sssesseessserererssserrrrrsserrtrrnnerrrnnrnnnnesrne 247 Expander Bus Connector Power Section 249 3 3 V Connectors JD1ABCAD nenn 249 5 Connectorsw2 TE amp Ei pias 250 TAV Gomeciorda Giras ii 250 12 V Connectors J21H amp da aa 250 18 Memory and Memory Terminator Modules Description Adding Memory WINS AAA SA at 251 Mod le EStdt 251 EDO DRAMA EE 252 Memory Module ay Out cenar Kae Re 256 Installing DIMMS ences rete ea ee 256 Removing KU OO 259 System Management into acid 260 Memory Module Connector AA 261 19 Interconnect Backplane Description Connectors Warnings and CALI Sus is 265 Interconnect el 265 Server Management Connechor EEN 267 Interconnect Backplane Power Connectors un 268 Interconnect to CPU Baseboard Signal Gechon 268 Interconnect to CPU Baseboard Power Section oooooccccccccconocccccnncconanncnnnnnnnannnnnons 271 3 3 V Connectors J21 J22 J23 and J934 271 5 V Connectors J25 and WEE 271 TZV Connec O del cutter ia 272 12 V Connectors J28 and J29 EE 272 Interconnect to I O Baseboard Signal Section oooonoccccnnnccinancccccnnccconanancnnnnnnnnanancno 272 Contents Interconnect to I O Baseboard Power Section Au 275 3 3 V Connectors J38 and J39 feces ee sll cede ee e
142. attery A Socket B Positive side up C Battery 285 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages This chapter helps you identify and solve problems that might occur while you are using the SETVET For detailed instructions about removing or installing a component or checking jumpers see the chapter whose number appears in parentheses after a given checklist item Also check the Contents and Index for specific page locations Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 125 Resetting the Server You can reset the server in several ways Manually Press To lt Ctrl Alt Del gt Clear server memory and reload the operating system This is a soft boot reset Reset button Clear server memory restart POST and reload the operating system Power off on Turn the server power off and then on This is a cold boot reset it has the same effect as pushing the reset button except that power is halted to all peripherals Programmed You can reset the server with software Initial Startup of the Server Problems that occur at initial startup are usually caused by incorrect installation or configuration of the server Hardware failure is a less frequent cause Checklist Q Are all cables correctly connected and secured LI Are the processors packaged in S
143. ave any tools or loose parts inside the chassis 2 Ensure that add in boards are firmly seated in their respective slots the retaining bracket for the add in boards is reinstalled interior cables are properly connected and the jig saw foam air baffle is in place 3 Grasp the top edge of the side cover and position it about an inch above the bottom flange of the chassis 4 Place the cover in contact with the strip magnets and align the back edge of the cover with the back of the chassis 5 Place one hand on the top edge of the cover and the other in the middle of it 6 While gently pressing in on the middle of the cover press down firmly on the top edge of it to seat the tabs onto the flanges of the chassis Reinstalling the Top Cover See Figure 11 1 1 Before reinstalling the top cover make sure the side covers are properly seated 2 While facing the back of the server position the top cover over the chassis so that the tabs along the front edge of the cover align with the slots in the top edge of the chassis 3 Gently lower the cover straight down on top of the server Then place your hands on the outer surface of the cover opposite each other and push down to seat it gt NOTE Because of the EMI gaskets attached to the underside of the top cover it is difficult to remove and replace 4 While pressing down firmly on the front edge of the cover push hard on the back edge to firmly engage the tabs in the slots in
144. aving memory modules successive DRAM transactions occurring in the different memory modules complete at a maximum rate of one transaction every 30 ns This yields a maximum data rate of 1 067 GB per second Although several DIMM population options are available the following table lists the populations that should be used to add memory to the system Table 18 1 Memory Module DIMM Support Category Supported DIMM Variety Speed 50 ns 60 ns Capacity Organization Refresh 32 MB 16 Mbit 4Mx4 DRAM 2 K or 4 K refresh 64 MB 64 Mbit 8Mx8 DRAM 4 K refresh 256 MB Double high 64 Mbit 16Mx4 DRAM 4K or 8K refresh Voltage 3 3V Data Width x72 ECC Page Mode EDO Buffered Non Buffered Maximum Height 2 4 inches DRAM Package TSSOP The memory module supports only CAS before RAS refresh When selecting a module make sure that the target refresh number corresponds to CBR refresh All DIMMs within a given bank must be identical From bank to bank the 450NX PCI chipset supports different varieties of DIMM sizes manufacturers and speeds Only configuration adhering to the following rules are validated and they are the only configuration that are fully supported e All DIMMs within a given back must be identical e Install 32 64 and 256 MB DIMMs in the memory banks e The total number of DIMMs on both memory modules 4 8 16 24 or 32 two memory module configuration e The total number of DIMMs using only one memory module
145. bber housings mounted side by side in a foam housing Each rubber housing contains three fans with their power cables connected to a common power connector Removing the Two Three fan Array Assemblies See Figures 12 2 and 12 3 1 2 140 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the air baffle as described earlier Label and unplug the two fan cables from the SCSI backplane Pull the front of the two three fan array and foam housing assembly out slightly to your left and toward you to remove it from the chassis NEIN OM06713 Figure 12 2 Two Three fan Array Assemblies Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling 6 Remove the defective three fan array assembly from the foam housing base Set the base aside and discard the three fan array assembly A A OM06776 Figure 12 3 Two Three fan Array Assemblies A Foam housing cover B Foam housing base for fan arrays CG Three fan array in rubber housing Reinstalling the Two Three fan Array Assemblies See Figures 12 2 and 12 3 1 Place the foam housing base flat side down on a flat surface 2 With the power cable side of the new three fan array assembly facing down place the assembly
146. built Power to drive is on SS O There is no drive installed in the bay Off Off Off The hot swap controller is responsible for turning the yellow drive fault LED on or off according to the states specified by commands received via SAF TE and IMB See Figures 9 3 9 4 and 9 5 1 Look at the yellow LEDs above the hot docking bays to determine which drive is bad 2 Insert the key in the front bezel lock and turn it to position C to unlock the doors Open the lower front doors of the server 3 Push down on the drive carrier latch of the bad drive and carrier assembly and while grasping the handle pull the assembly toward you to disengage the drive from the backplane connector 4 Carefully slide the assembly out of the bay and place it on an antistatic surface 5 Orient the new carrier and drive assembly in front of the hot docking bay guide rails so that metal fingers of the perforated metal bracket attached to the carrier are facing to your right Make sure you correctly place the carrier into the guide rails to avoid damage 6 While grasping only the drive carrier handle firmly push the assembly into the bay until the drive docks with the hot docking backplane connector A CAUTION Do not press on the perforated metal bracket of the carrier when you push the assembly into the bay Otherwise you may damage the metal fingers of the bracket 7 Close the lower front doors of the server 8 For security and to prevent unaut
147. cautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines 2 Turn off the server and unplug the AC power cords from the power supplies or wall outlets 3 Remove the top and right side covers See Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 4 Move the jumper on J3HIC from pins 6 B C to pins 6 A B Reinstall the covers and plug in the power cords 6 Turn on the server and wait for POST to complete This automatically restores CMOS and RTC to Setup default values See Chapter 3 Power on Self Test Description Running 7 Turn off the server unplug the power cords and remove the top and right side covers 8 Move the jumper from J3H1C pins 6 A B to pins 6 B C 9 Reinstall the covers and plug in the power cords 10 Run the SSU to configure your server See Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run a Clearing the Password The jumper on J3H1C pins 5 B C protects the CMOS password during server reset Moving the jumper to pins 5 A B clears the password during server reset To clear the CMOS password 1 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines 2 Turn off the server and unplug the AC power cords from the power supplies or wall outlets 3 Remove the top and right side covers See Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 4 Move the jumper from J3HIC pins 5 B C to pins 5 A B Reinstall the covers and plug in the power cords 6 Turn on the server and wait for POST
148. ce is treated as a fixed hard disk drive All Disks All removable media drives supported by the BIOS are treated as fixed drives If you are a NetWare user all removable media drives are automatically supported by NetWare as fixed disks regardless of how you set this option Disabled No removable media drives running under DOS are treated as fixed drives Device driver software is needed because the drives are not controlled by the BIOS When enabled at boot time a prompt displays to let you run the SCSISelect program No effect if the channel BIOS is disabled Enabled lets the server boot from a CD The option displays only if the channel BIOS is configured to include it To boot from a hard drive or other device either disable this option or make sure there is no bootable CD in the drive No effect if the BIOS is disabled When enabled the channel BIOS supports Int 13h extensions that are required for bootable CD ROMs The option displays only if the BIOS is configured to include bootable CD ROM support You can disable the option if the boot device is nota CD ROM but it does no harm to leave it enabled No effect if the BIOS is disabled 89 AD450NX Server System Product Guide SCSI Disk Utilities Menu When you select SCSI Disk Utilities the SCSISelect utility scans the SCSI bus for SCSI devices After scanning the bus the utility reports a description of each device If a device is present select it and press lt
149. cket J16 9 Reinstall the memory module as described in Chapter 12 10 Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 11 Reconnect all external cables and the power cords to the server 12 Turn on your monitor and then your server 13 Run the SSU to configure the server and to properly attribute ECC memory Failure to do so may degrade the performance of your server For information about running the SSU see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run 258 Chapter 18 Memory and Memory Terminator Modules Description Adding Memory Removing DIMMs See Figure 18 8 1 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines 2 Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 3 Remove the memory module as described in Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling 4 Starting with the first DIMM filled socket closest to the top edge of the module remove the DIMMs one at a time A CAUTION Use extreme care when removing a DIMM Too much pressure can damage the socket slot Apply only enough pressure on the plastic ejector levers to release the DIMM 5 Gently push the plastic ejector levers out and down to eject the DIMM from the socket Figure 18 8 6 Carefully lift the DIMM away from the socket and store it in an antistatic package 7 Repeat the above steps to remove other DIMMs OM06768 Figure 18 8 Removing DIMMs 8 Reinstall the memory
150. configured for console redirection Mode Server is powered off During POST After OS boots Disabled Redirect window appears Redirect window Redirect window but is blank Pre boot EMP commands available Redirect window Redirect window Always Active EMP commands available Redirect window EMP commands available The operation mode can be modified by selections in the Reset and Power on off dialogs These are server control dialogs available in EMP Console 93 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Table 7 2 EMP Console Access Modes Server not configured for console redirection Mode Server is powered off During POST After OS boots Disabled Redirect window appears Redirect window appears Redirect window appears but is blank but is blank but is blank Pre boot EMP commands available EMP commands available Redirect window appears but is blank Always Active EMP commands available EMP commands available EMP commands available Requirements This section outlines the requirements and configurations necessary for using EMP Console Operating Systems e Windows 95 16 MB of RAM 32 MB recommended 20 MB disk space e Windows NT Windows NT 4 0 24 MB of RAM 32 MB recommended 20 MB disk space Client Configuration EMP Console supports all COM ports on the client system along with any Windows NT 95 compatible modem Server Configuration EMP Console requires the server s COM 2 port to be connected to an external m
151. connectors for installing up to four processors packaged in Single Edge Contact S E C cartridges two memory connectors for installing two 16 DIMM memory modules or one 16 DIMM memory module and one memory terminator module an onboard DC to DC switching converter that supplies voltage for the CPU baseboard and memory modules an onboard DC to DC linear converter that supplies voltage for the logic on the CPU baseboard four sockets for VRM8 3 converters that supply core voltage for the processors two sockets for VRM8 3 converters that supply L2 cache voltage for the processors PC serial peripheral interface SPI and in system programming ISP server management interfaces expander bus interface connector In a symmetric multiprocessor SMP environment all processors are equal and have no preassigned tasks Distributing the processing loads among processors increases server performance This is particularly useful when application demand is low and the I O request load is high In an SMP environment the processors share a common bus the same interrupt structure and access to common memory and I O channels The SMP implementation conforms to the Multiprocessor Specification Version 1 4 The onboard PCI and memory controller PMC supports from 128 MB to 8 GB of ECC memory either fast page mode FPM or extended data out EDO 3 3 V 50 or 60 ns DRAMs mounted on JEDEC DIMMs 237 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Processors
152. control operations and to launch the management plug ins At the top of the window is the menu and tool bar These provide the options to initiate plug ins and other support features A status bar at the bottom displays connection information such as server name line status and mode 95 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Toolbar The tool bar buttons of the EMP Console main window combine server control and management plug in commands available from both the Connect and Action menus as follows Displays the Connect dialog to allow connection to a selected server Disconnects from the currently connected server Displays the Power On Off dialog Displays the Reset dialog LS ele SEL Launches the SEL Viewer not available on AD450NX servers SDR Launches the SDR Viewer not available on AD450NX servers TBI Launches the FRU Viewer ap Displays the Phonebook Dialog Displays the online help a Status Bar The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the main window It contains the following status information e SERVER NAME the name of the connected server when connecting via modem e LINE the type of line connection This is either direct or modem e MODE either Redirect of EMP depending on whether the EMP has control of the COM 2 port e LINE STATUS gives status information about the server connection For example if a server is connected the status bar says Connected Otherwise the line is blank EMP
153. control registers are relocatable anywhere in the 64 Kbyte space this allows multiple devices in a single server The SVGA controller is fully compatible with these video standards CGAT EGAT Hercules graphics MDAT and VGA The server comes with 2 MB of onboard video DRAM allowing the controller to support 132 column text modes and high resolution graphics with 1280 x 1024 x 16 colors Depending on the environment the controller displays up to 16 7 M colors in some video resolutions The SVGA controller supports analog VGA monitors single and multiple frequency interlaced and noninterlaced with a maximum vertical retrace interlaced frequency of 87 Hz Video Modes The CL GD5446 provides all the standard IBM VGA modes The following tables show all the supported video modes Standard VGA Modes Colors number Pixel Horiz Vert Modes palette Char x Char Display Freq Freq Freq in Hex size Row Cell Resolution Mode MHz KHz Hz 0 1 16 256K 40x25 9x16 360 X 400 Text 14 31 5 70 2 3 16 256K 80x25 9x16 720 X 400 Text 28 31 5 70 4 5 4 256K 40x25 8x8 320 X 200 Graphics 12 5 31 5 70 6 2 256K 80x25 8x8 640 X 200 Graphics 25 31 5 70 7 Mono 80x25 9x16 720 X 400 Text 28 31 5 70 D 16 256K 40x25 8x8 320 X 200 Graphics 12 5 31 5 70 E 16 256K 80x25 8x14 640 X 200 Graphics 25 31 5 70 F Mono 80x25 8x14 640 X 350 Graphics 25 31 5 70 10 16 256K 80x25 8x14 640 X 350 Graphics 25 31 5 70 11 2 256K 80x30 8x16 640 X 480 Graphics 2
154. ct Guide 32 bit PCI Connector 226 Pin A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 The cross symbol after the signal indicates that the slot serves 5 V compliant devices only Signal TRST_L 12 V TMS TDI 5 V INTA_L INTC_L 5 V RESERVED 5 V RESERVED GND GND RESERVED RESET_L 5 V GRANT_L GND RESERVED AD30 3 3 V AD28 AD26 GND AD24 IDSEL 3 3 V AD22 AD20 GND AD18 Pin A32 A33 A34 A35 A36 A37 A38 A39 A40 A41 A42 A43 A44 A45 A46 A47 A48 A49 A50 A51 A52 A53 A54 A55 A56 A57 A58 A59 A60 A61 A62 Signal AD16 3 3 V FRAME_L GND TRDY_L GND STOP_L 3 3 V SDONE SBO_L GND PAR AD15 3 3 V AD13 AD11 GND AD9 KEY KEY C BEO_L 3 3 V AD6 AD4 GND AD2 ADO 5 V REQ64_L 5 V 5 V Pin B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 Signal 12V TCK GND Ground TDO 5 V 5 V INTB_L INTD_L PRSNT1_L RESERVED PRSNT2_L GND GND RESERVED GND CLK GND REQ_L 5V AD31 AD29 GND AD27 AD25 3 3 V C BE3_L AD23 GND AD21 AD19 3 3 V Pin B32 B33 B34 B35 B36 B37 B38 B39 B40 B41 B42 B43 B44 B45 B46 B47 B48 B49 B50 B51 B52 B53 B54 B55 B56 B57 B58 B59 B60 B61 B62 Signal AD17 C BE2_L GND IRDY_L
155. d do the following 1 Verify that the video controller board is fully seated in the I O baseboard connector 2 Run the SSU to specify that an add in VGA EGA controller board is installed 3 Reboot the server for changes to take effect 4 If there are still no characters on the screen after you reboot the server and POST emits a beep code write down the beep code you hear This information is useful for your service representative See Error Codes and Messages on page 295 5 If you do not receive a beep code and characters do not appear the video monitor or video controller may have failed Contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance Characters Are Distorted or Incorrect Check the following Q Are the brightness and contrast controls properly adjusted on the video monitor Refer to the manufacturer s documentation U Are the video monitor signal and power cables properly installed If the problem persists the monitor may be faulty or it may be the incorrect type Contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance Incorrect or no Beep Codes If the server operates normally but there was no beep the speaker may be defective Run the SSU to verify that the speaker is enabled Chapter 5 If the speaker is enabled but not functioning contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance Record the beep code emitted by POST and refer to Error Codes and Messa
156. d Supplies You Nee 127 Equipment Log hear se al 127 e EE 127 Removing the Top LIV viii A mat eerie 128 FREMOVING A Side ENEE tege eet eege EE ee EE 130 Reinstalling a Side DOVER aa 130 Reinstalling the Top Cover eu ee 131 Removing the Plastic Front Bezel n444444unnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 132 Reinstalling the Plastic Front Bezel ooooconnnnnccccconnnnnonoccccconcnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnrncnnnnr nana 132 Removing the Snap on Drive Bay Cover ke 134 Reinstalling the Snap on Drive Bay Cover 134 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling Warnings and ENEE is geet occu le 137 Tools and Supplies You Need WEE 137 EQUIP SA A E EEA Ee 137 Jig saw Foam Air Baffle ccoo cd 138 Removing the Jig saw Foam Air Bafle en 138 Reinstalling the Jig saw Foam Air Baitte cece cence cere eeeeneeeeeeeetteneeeeeeeeeeteeaes 138 Two Three fan E ue EE 140 Removing the Two Three fan Array Assemblies nn 140 Reinstalling the Two Three fan Array Aesembles ns 141 Support Panel for Terminator and Memory Modules nen anne 142 Removing the Support Panel 142 Reinstalling the Support Panel ooo een 142 Contents Terminator and Memory Modules 20er ee ee 144 Removing a Memory MOdulS is tas 144 Reinstalling a Memory M dule n u un enee 144 Removing Installing a Memory Terminator Module 145 Front Side Bus Terminator Module EEN 146 Removing a TerminatorM dule 2 ar ee td 146 Reinstalling a Terminator Module AAR 1
157. d mechanical interlock It prevents removal of the supply when the AC power cord is attached Server chassis The electrogalvanized metal used in manufacturing the server chassis minimizes electromagnetic interference EMI and radio frequency interference RFI Four power supply bays 3 5 inch diskette drive in the 3 5 inch bay Four 5 25 inch half height bays for removable media devices top bay contains a CD ROM drive A 3 5 inch bay above the 5 25 inch bays provides space for a 1 inch high by 3 5 inch wide SCSI or IDE boot hard disk drive accessible from inside the server Twelve 3 5 inch hot docking bays arranged in two rows each row has space for either six 1 inch high or six 1 6 inch high 3 5 inch wide single connector attachment SCA SCSI hard disk drives each row is ona separate SCSI channel Eleven I O expansion slot covers The plastic front bezel provides airflow and easy access to drives in the hot docking bays The removable top and side covers provide proper airflow and easy access to components inside the server You must remove the top cover before you can remove the side covers A padlock not supplied on the back of the chassis secures the covers to prevent unauthorized entry into the server only technically qualified personnel should remove the server covers continued 20 Server Features continued Feature Cooling fans Front panel board Server management CPU baseboard Processor packaged
158. ddress in the range of x100h x3FFh x500h x7FFh x900h xBFFh and xDO0Oh xFFFh to be internally aliased to the range 0100h O3FFh before performing any other address range checking Enabled lets the BIOS automatically detect and correct single bit memory errors When enabled the data returned and buffered for a delayed inbound read may be reaccessed following a disconnect Configures the number of Dwords that will be prefetched on memory read multiple commands Configures the number of Dwords that will be prefetched on memory read multiple commands Configures the number of Dwords that will be prefetched on memory read multiple commands Only enable when the total number of bootable devices is less than eight Enable this node only when nonPCI compliant VGA cards need to be debugged Enabling will impact I O resources for a large configuration Security Menu Feature User Password Is Administrator Password Is Set User Password Set Administrator Password Password on Boot Diskette Access Secure Mode Timer Secure Mode Hot Key Secure Mode Boot Video Blanking Diskette Write Protect Front Panel Lockout Option Clear Clear Enter Enter Disabled Enabled User Administrator Disabled 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 1 hr 2hr 1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Chapter 4 Setup Utility When to Run Descri
159. dimensions and weight 34 features 20 21 22 install SCSI drivers 43 install video drivers 43 major components 23 management 21 211 moving 35 on site installation 33 unlocking front casters 35 won t boot from CD 44 Setup utility running 49 when to run 49 Specifications environmental 34 physical 34 SSU See system setup utility Status indicators drive activity LED green 24 drive fault LED yellow 24 drive power LED green 24 SCSI drives 116 Supplies 111 119 127 137 179 283 Switches alarm 26 DC power 287 288 NMI 24 power 24 reset 24 287 server power 120 system power 38 47 128 174 Symmetric multiprocessor 237 System setup utility 36 CFG files 63 customizing 66 defining an ISA card 70 exiting 79 launching a task 66 location 63 OVL files 63 removing an ISA card 71 running 65 locally 64 remotely 64 SCI files 63 when to run 63 T Three fan array assembly reinstalling 141 166 removing 140 166 Tools 111 119 127 137 179 283 Troubleshooting additional procedures 290 application software 295 beep codes 293 302 checklist 287 288 cooling fans 292 DC power switch 288 floppy drive light 294 hard drive light 294 initial system startup 287 new software 288 no characters on screen 293 operating system prompt 291 power distribution backplane 295 screen characters incorrect 293 server lights 290 server problems
160. doffs Make sure the baseboard is properly seated and tighten all screws firmly 8 0 inch pounds Connect the interconnect backplane to the CPU and I O baseboards as described earlier Reinstall the two three fan array assemblies as described earlier Reinstall the air baffle as described earlier 10 Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 12 13 11 Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling Connect all internal cables to the I O baseboard Reinstall the add in boards in their original expansion slots as described earlier Connect all internal cables that go to the add in boards installed in the expansion slots Connect all peripheral device cables that go to the I O panel on the rear of the system Run the SSU and use the saved configuration file to restore all options to the same settings For information about running this utility see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run A B OM06728 Figure 12 21 I O Baseboard A Snap on standoffs three B Screws nine 171 AD450NX Server System Product Guide SCSI Hot docking Backplane The server contains a two channel WideUltra SCSI hot docking backplane It supports hot swapping of SCA type SCSI drives enclosure management and monitoring functions co
161. duct Guide Calculating Power Usage Use the worksheets in Tables 20 4 and 20 5 to calculate the total DC power used by your server configuration 280 The documentation that comes with each add in device should specify its current and voltage requirements To calculate the total combined wattage for your server do this 1 2 List the current for each board and device in the appropriate voltage level column in Table 20 4 Add the currents in each column of Table 20 4 and enter the total current for each column in Table 20 5 Multiply the voltage by the total current to get the total wattage for each voltage level Add the total wattage for each voltage level to arrive at a total combined power usage on the power supply Table 20 4 Worksheet for Calculating DC Power Usage Current maximum at voltage levels Device 3 3 V 5 V 12 V 12 V I O baseboard 5A 4 25 A 2A 1A 16 bit ISA slot 32 bit primary PCI slot 1 J4 32 bit primary PCI slot 2 J5 32 bit secondary PCI slot 3 J6 32 bit secondary PCI slot 4 J7 32 bit secondary PCI slot 5 J8 32 bit secondary PCI slot 6 J9 64 bit PCI slot 7 J10 64 bit PCI slot 8 J11 64 bit PCI slot 9 J12 64 bit PCI slot 10 J13 64 bit PCI slot 11 J14 CPU baseboard with four 65 W processors 4 6 A 6 2 A 28 5 A Primary memory module Secondary memory module 3 5 inch diskette drive 0 3 A CD ROM drive 0 4 A 1 0A SCSI tape drive 1st 3 5 inch SCA SCSI hard disk drive 2nd 3
162. e expert The expertise level determines which tasks are visible in the Available Tasks section and what actions each task performs For a new mode setting to take effect the user must exit the SSU and restart it e Language this button lets you change the strings in the SSU to strings of the appropriate language For a new language setting to take effect you must exit the SSU and restart it e Other this button lets you change other miscellaneous options in the SSU The changes are instantaneous To change the interface default values Use the mouse to click on the proper button in the Preferences section of the SSU Main window or Use the tab and arrow keys to highlight the desired button and press the spacebar or lt Enter gt or Access the menu bar with the mouse or hot keys Alt underlined letter Launching a Task 66 It is possible to have many tasks open at the same time although some tasks may require complete control to avoid possible conflicts The tasks achieve complete control by keeping the task as the center of operation until you close the task window To launch a task 1 In the SSU Main window double click on the task name under Available Tasks to display the main window for the selected task or Highlight the task name and click on OK or Use the tab and arrow keys to highlight the task name and press the lt spacebar gt or lt Enter gt Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run a System
163. e gt NOTE If the extracted files do not include the Gros zeg file you must extract the BIOS update file directly to the bootable diskette in drive A Example type 10006B11 A and press lt Enter gt 217 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Running the BIOS Update Utility 1 2 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Insert the update diskette into drive A and turn on the monitor and server When the server boots from the diskette follow the screen prompts If you choose option 1 the server will automatically reboot after the update process completes so that the changes will take effect Remove the diskette when the server starts to boot If you choose option 2 you must reboot the server by pressing reset or lt Enter gt after the update process completes for the changes to take effect Remove the diskette when the server starts to boot As the server boots check the BIOS identifier version number to make sure the update was successful When the following message appears press lt F2 gt Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP After entering Setup press lt F9 gt to load Setup defaults then press lt Enter gt to confirm Set the Setup options to the settings you wrote down before updating the BIOS Press lt F10 gt to exit and save the settings then press lt Enter gt to confirm and to reboot the server To protect the contents of flash memory turn off the server unplu
164. e 44 for instructions Operating system not found Copying Configuration Software to Diskettes When you copy software from the CD onto diskettes device drivers suitable for several different operating systems are copied onto the diskettes However your operating system will read only those drivers it can recognize so you cannot usually check the directory of a diskette that is not formatted for your operating system Instead you may see a message to the effect disk not formatted do you want to format it now Don t worry the drivers for YOUR operating system should be present on the diskette and available for you to load on the system 1 Before starting make sure that you have on hand several blank high density diskettes 2 From the CD ROM menu bar select Create Diskettes and press lt Enter gt 3 Follow the prompts to copy the software onto the diskettes 4 When finished select Quit to DOS on the CD ROM menu bar and press lt Enter gt 5 Remove the CD from the drive Installing Video Drivers After configuring the server you can install various video drivers to take full advantage of the enhanced features provided by the onboard Cirrus Logic GD5446 PCI VisualMedia accelerator The server may not operate properly without these drivers installed After copying the drivers from the Configuration Software CD to diskettes read the README TXT file on the Display Drivers and DOS Utilities diskette The TXT file contain
165. e VO riser card Carefully pull the signal cable through slot in the center bulkhead of the chassis Remove and save the two screws that attach the ICMB board to the rear bulkhead of the chassis Pull the board toward you to unsnap it from the snap on standoff Place the board on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper Reinstalling the ICMB Board See Figure 12 24 176 1 2 3 Remove the ICMB board from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one Position the board over the snap on and threaded standoffs on the rear bulkhead of the chassis Press the board onto the snap on standoff and insert the screws loosely into the threaded standoffs Make sure the board is properly aligned and tighten the screws firmly 8 0 inch pounds REINER Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling Carefully insert the ICMB signal cable through the slot in the center bulkhead of the chassis Connect the signal cable to connector J1 on the I O riser card Reinstall the air baffle as described earlier Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 OM06734 Figure 12 24 ICMB Board A Screws two B ICMB cable to J1 on I O riser card C Snap on standoff 177 13 Boot Drives and Removable Media Drives Installing Removing Replacing This chapter tells how to install remove and replace an IDE or
166. e al tipo richiesto Ad ogni fonte di alimentazione corrisponde un cavo di alimentazione in c a separato L interruttore attivato disattivato nel pannello anteriore non interrompe l alimentazione in c a del sistema Per interromperla necessario scollegare tutti i cavi di alimentazione in c a dalle prese a muro o dall alimentazione di corrente PASSI DI SICUREZZA Qualora si rimuovano le coperture del telaio per accedere all interno del sistema seguire i seguenti passi 1 Spegnere tutti i dispositivi periferici collegati al sistema 2 Spegnere il sistema usando il pulsante spento acceso dell interruttore del sistema 3 Togliere tutte le spine dei cavi del sistema dalle prese elettriche 4 Identificare e sconnettere tutti i cavi attaccati ai collegamenti I O od alle prese installate sul retro del sistema 5 Qualora si tocchino i componenti proteggersi dallo scarico elettrostatico SES portando un cinghia anti statica da polso che attaccata alla presa a terra del telaio del sistema qualsiasi superficie non dipinta 6 Non far operare il sistema quando il telaio amp senza le coperture Dopo aver seguito i sei passi di SICUREZZA sopracitati togliere le coperture del telaio del sistema come seque 1 Aprire e rimuovere il lucchetto dal retro del sistema qualora ve ne fosse uno installato 2 Togliere e mettere in un posto sicuro tutte le viti delle coperture 3 Togliere le coperture Per il giusto flusso dell
167. e between I O baseboard and power distribution backplane e passive power transient filtering via bulk decoupling capacitors for 5 V and 12 V e power cable fault detect 265 AD450NX Server System Product Guide OM06769 Figure 19 1 Interconnect Backplane CPU baseboard Expander bus connector to the CPU baseboard Captive screws Mechanical unit crank Mechanical unit lock unlock lever moou gt 266 Chapter 19 Interconnect Backplane Description Connectors Server Management Connector The 34 conductor signal cable from the power distribution backplane plugs into the 34 pin connector on the interconnect backplane This cable links the CPU and I O baseboards to the power distribution backplane and the SCSI hot docking backplane It is used mostly for server management but the power supplies also use this connector to remotely sense the voltages being delivered to the baseboards Pin ON OA fw DY WwW WW WN DD NNN NN NIN gt gt gt gt ch 0 FIOM OO 0 DAN ODO Om P Go DPD H OO 0 oO N OT A OIN O Signals ISP_SDI ISP_HSBP_SDO ISP_EN2_L ISP_SCLK INTRUSION_L 12C_GLOBAL_SDA PWR_GOOD GND VCC_STDBY RESET_PWR_DIST_L VCC_STDBY GND 12C_FPC_SCL 12C_GLOBAL_SCL 12C_FPC_SDA GND GND RESET_HSBP_L GND VBIAS INTERLOCK L PS_PWR_ON ISP_MODE GND GND 12V_SENSE 5V_SENSE GND 3 3V_SENSE GND GND SPARE_1 SPARE_2 Descriptio
168. each power supply or wall outlet 4 Label and disconnect all peripheral cables attached to the I O panel on the back of the server 5 Provide some electrostatic discharge ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strap attached to chassis ground of the server any unpainted metal surface when handling components Warnings and Cautions These warnings and cautions apply whenever you remove the top and side covers of the server to access components inside it Integration of the server should be done only by technically qualified personnel A WARNING Server power on off The push button on off power switch on the front panel of the server does not turn off the AC power To remove AC power from the server you must unplug each AC power cord from each power supply or wall outlet Hazardous conditions power supply and power distribution backplane Hazardous voltage current and energy levels are present inside the power supply and the power distribution backplane There are no user serviceable parts inside them servicing should be done only by technically qualified personnel Hazardous conditions devices and cables Hazardous electrical conditions may be present on power telephone and communication cables Turn off the server and disconnect telecommunications systems networks modems and each power cord attached to the server before opening it Otherwise personal injury or equipment damage can result A CAUTION Electr
169. ee from connector J1B1 on the I O baseboard Make sure that you do not scrape the card against other components Place the card on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper Reinstalling the I O Riser Card See Figure 12 20 168 1 2 Remove the I O riser card from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one Holding the card by the top edge or upper corners carefully insert the edge connector of the card into connector J1B1 on the I O baseboard Press the card firmly into the connector Insert the screw you removed earlier in the threaded hole in the chassis Tighten the screw firmly 8 0 inch pounds Connect the ICMB signal cable to J1 on the riser card Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling OM06730 Figure 12 20 I O Riser Card A J1B1 I O connector B J1 ICMB connector C CMD signal cable D Screw 169 AD450NX Server System Product Guide I O Baseboard A CAUTION The VO baseboard can be extremely sensitive to ESD and always requires careful handling After removing the baseboard from the server place it component side up on a nonconductive static free surface to prevent shorting out the battery leads If you place the baseboard on a conductive surface the back up battery leads may short out If they do this will result in a loss of CMOS data and will drain the battery Do n
170. ended to be copied onto diskettes or onto your hard disk as a full function OS that supports networking or Windowst To run your server and applications you must buy the OS of your choice and install it on the server See Figure 2 5 Open the CD tray by pressing the open close button on the front panel of the CD ROM drive the tray will slide out of the drive 2 Open the CD case Press down on the center hub of the case with your finger to release the hub tension on the CD CAUTION 42 Handle the CD only by the inner and outer edges Do not touch the data side of the CD the side without the label Gently grasp the center hole and outer edge of the CD remove it from the case and place it label side up in the tray Press the open close button or gently push on the tray it will automatically slide into the drive OM06774 Figure 2 5 CD ROM Drive A Open close push button switch B CD tray Press the reset switch on the front panel to reboot the server When POST completes the server beeps once boots from the CD installs a mouse driver and displays the CD ROM menu Use the arrow keys to scroll through the menu bar and to view the tasks in the pop up menus Chapter 2 On site Installation Installing the Server lt gt NOTE If you do not see the CD ROM menu but see the following message instead you need to change the Boot Device Priority to the CD ROM See Server Won t Boot From the CD on pag
171. equency ratios The bus frequency is 100 MHz The core frequencies are based on the 100 MHz bus frequency Table 17 2 J31 Jumpers for Bus Ratios Pins 5 and 6 Pins 7 and 8 Pins 9 and 10 Bus Ratio Core Frequency MHz 1 1 1 Reserved 1 1 0 9 2 450 1 0 1 72 350 1 0 0 Reserved 0 1 1 5 1 500 0 1 0 4 1 400 0 0 1 3 1 300 0 0 0 Reserved Key 0 open 1 closed The jumper block provides three parking positions for storing the jumpers They can be parked across pins 11 and 12 13 and 14 and 15 and 16 Changing a Jumper Setting 1 2 3 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Turn off the server and unplug the AC power cords from the power supplies or wall outlets Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the VRM from connector J1 on the CPU baseboard See Chapter 12 From the tables above determine which jumper you need to move Then move it to the new location Reinstall the VRM in connector J1 Reinstall the top and right side covers Turn on the server and wait for POST to complete See Chapter 3 Power on Self Test Description Running Run the SSU to reconfigure your server See Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run 241 AD450NX Server System Product Guide CPU Baseboard Layout 242 zz PT AE ETIOMTMOOUW gt
172. er 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the air baffle as described earlier 4 Place your finger under the pull tab of the latch bar and your thumb on top of the bar Then press down on the bar with your thumb while gently pulling back on the tab with your finger to release tension on the latch bar hook 5 Pull the tab end of latch bar toward you to unhook it and open the bar to about 90 6 Slide the bar to your left to unhook it from the slot guide Set the bar aside 7 Simultaneously rotate the eject insert levers of the terminator module outward about 50 to eject the module out of the slot 2 connector on the CPU baseboard 8 Slide the module out of the slot guides and place the it component side down on a nonconductive static free surface a Reinstalling a Terminator Module 146 See Figure 12 7 1 Grasp the terminator module by the eject insert levers and carefully slide it into the slot guides until the levers engage with the flanges in the front sides of the guides 2 Simultaneously rotate the levers inward until they are flush with the edge of the module to seat the module into the slot 2 connector on the CPU baseboard Insert the hook end of the latch bar in the slot of the right slot guide Close the latch bar by rotating it inward onto the left slot guide 5 Then press in on the middle of the bar until the latch hook catches under the front flange in the left slot guide 6 Reinstall the a
173. erver System Product Guide 306 Equipment Log continued Component IDE Hard Disk Boot Drive SCSI Hard Disk Boot Drive Diskette Drive Tape Drive IDE CD ROM Drive SCSI CD ROM Drive SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 1 SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 2 SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 3 SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 4 SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 5 SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 6 SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 7 SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 8 SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 9 SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 10 SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 11 SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 12 VGA EGA Adapter Board SCSI Host Adapter Board PCI RAID Controller Board Manufacturer and Model Number Serial Number Date Installed continued Appendix B Equipment Log Equipment Log continued Component Manufacturer and Model Number Serial Number Date Installed 307 C Warnings WARNING English US AVERTISSEMENT Francais WARNUNG Deutsch AVVERTENZA Italiano ADVERTENCIAS Espanol 309 AD450NX Server System Product Guide WARNING English US 310 The power supply in this product contains no user serviceable parts There may be more than one supply in this product Refer servicing only to qualified personnel Do not attempt to modify or use the supplied AC power cord if it is not the exact type required A product with more than one power supply will have a separate AC power cord for each supply The DC push button on off switch on the system does not tur
174. es Communications English translation of the notice above This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the interference causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus ICES 003 of the Canadian Department of Communications 304 B Equipment Log Use this equipment log to record pertinent information about your server You will need some of this information when you run the System Setup Utility SSU Record the model and serial numbers of the server components dates of component removal or replacement and the vendor s name Be sure to record the same information for any components added to the server such as hard disk drives add in boards or printers The location of serial numbers on add in boards hard disk drives and external equipment such as video monitors or printers varies from one manufacturer to another Equipment Log Component Manufacturer and Model Number Serial Number Date Installed Server UO Baseboard I O Riser Card CPU Baseboard Processor 1 Processor 2 Processor 3 Processor 4 VRM 1 VRM 2 VRM 3 VRM 4 VRM 5 VRM 6 Memory Module 1 Memory Module 2 Power Distribution Backplane SCSI Hot docking Backplane Interconnect Backplane Hot swappable Power Supply Hot swappable Power Supply Hot swappable Power Supply Hot swappable Power Supply Video Monitor Keyboard Mouse continued 305 AD450NX S
175. escription Connectors 20 Power System Description Calculating Power Usage 21 Back up Battery Replacing Disposing 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages A Regulatory Specifications B Equipment Log C Warnings Conventions A WARNING WARNING indicates a hazard that can cause personal injury or equipment damage if the hazard is not avoided A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a hazard that might cause personal injury damage to hardware or software if the hazard is not avoided lt gt NOTE Notes provide information and may be used to emphasize a recommended sequence of steps lt Fl gt A letter number symbol or word enclosed in lt gt represents a key on your keyboard For example the instruction press lt F1 gt means press the key labeled F1 on your keyboard lt Enter gt The lt Enter gt key is used to enter commands and responses to prompts Some manuals refer to lt Enter gt as RETURN CARRIAGE RETURN lt CR gt or use an arrow All of these terms are interchangeable lt x y gt Two or three key names separated by plus signs indicate multiple key entries For example lt Ctrl Alt Del gt means hold down lt Ctrl gt and lt Alt gt and press lt Del gt L In all tables in this guide active low signal names have an _L symbol following the name for example DSTBN3_L Active high signal names do not have a _L suffix Contents Quick Reference and Conventions For tran
176. ezel provide access to the front panel controls 3 5 inch diskette drive bay 5 25 inch drive bays and the 3 5 inch SCSI hot docking drive bays You must remove the top and side covers before you can remove the front bezel e The plastic snap on bay cover provides access to the 5 25 inch drive bays without removing the other covers 127 AD450NX Server System Product Guide CAUTION For proper cooling and airflow do not operate the server with the covers removed Always reinstall them before turning on the server Removing the Top Cover See Figure 11 1 1 2 3 4 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Turn off all peripheral devices connected to the server Turn the server off with the push button on off power switch on the front panel Unplug the AC power cords from the power inlet receptacles on the power supplies or from the power source outlets 5 Label and disconnect all peripheral cables attached to the I O panel on the back of the server 6 If you installed a padlock through the metal loop on the back of the server unlock the padlock and remove it 7 Remove and save the screws that attach the top cover to the chassis 8 While facing the back of the server grasp the built in handles on the back of the top cover amp NOTE Because of the EMI gaskets attached to the underside of the top cover it is difficult to remove and replace 9 Pull hard on the back edge of the cover to disengage
177. file a damage claim with the carrier immediately Save the shipping boxes and packing materials to repackage the server in the event you decide to move it to another site Chapter 2 On site Installation Installing the Server Moving the Server The front casters on the base of the server are locked to prevent the server from moving 1 Using your finger pull the hinged plastic locks to the open position to unlock the front casters 2 After you connect peripheral devices cables and power cords to the server slide the server in to its operating position 3 Push the plastic locks to the closed position to lock the front casters OM06775 Figure 2 1 Server Casters A Hinged plastic caster lock B Closed C Open 35 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Connecting Peripheral Devices A CAUTION Before connecting peripheral devices to the server verify that the power cords are unplugged from the power supplies Otherwise equipment 36 damage can result Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server If your server normally operates without a video monitor and keyboard for example as a network server you must install them to configure it You may remove them after running the SSU See Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run for information about running this utility Con
178. from the bus If two or more devices are connected to the channel leave this option set to yes Initiate Wide Negotiation yes When yes the channel initiates wide negotiations with the no SCSI device The channel always responds if the device initiates wide negotiations Send Start Unit Command yes No effect if the BIOS is disabled When yes required for no SCSI hard drives the channel sends the Start Unit Command to the SCSI device during bootup This reduces the load on the server power supply by allowing the channel to power up SCSI devices one at a time when you boot the server The channel sends the command to the device with the lowest SCSI ID When it responds the channel sends the command to the next highest SCSI ID When no each device powers up when the server powers up if the device has been jumpered to wait for a start command it will not start BIOS Multiple LUN Support yes When yes the channel supports booting from a SCSI device no with multiple LUNs Include in BIOS Scan yes When yes the host adapter BIOS controls the SCSI device if no it is an Int 13 device such as a SCSI disk drive When no the adapter BIOS does not scan SCSI IDs for devices to control device driver software must be used to control the SCSI devices 88 Feature Plug and Play SCAM Support Reset SCSI Bus at IC Initialization Extended BIOS Translation for DOS Drives greater than 1 GB Host Adapter BIOS Configuration Utility Reserves BIOS S
179. fting benyttes kun batteri som anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten Brukt batteri returneres apparatleverand ren A VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anv nd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren Kassera anv nt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion VAROITUS Paristo voi r j ht jos se on virheellisesti asennettu Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin H vit k ytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti 284 Chapter 21 Back up Battery Replacing Disposing Replacing the Back up Battery See Figure 21 1 1 2 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Using the tip of your finger press down lightly on the lithium battery and slide it toward the right side of the socket Gently lift the battery out of the socket and dispose of it according to local ordinance Remove the new battery from its package and being careful to observe correct polarity positive side up gently insert it into the battery socket Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Run the SSU to restore the configuration settings to the RTC For information about running this utility see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run ANN OM06770 Figure 21 1 Lithium Back up B
180. g OCT fu un u um un u m u m u COOC o mm OO gt OM06196 Figure 10 1 Removing a Power Supply Redundant power system fourth power supply is redundant AC power inlet receptacle and safety interlock mechanism Power supply handle Four screws PS LED green power LED green current 121 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Replacing a Power Supply 122 See Figure 10 2 1 Remove the new power supply from the protective packaging and place it on an antistatic surface Record the model and serial numbers of the power supply in your equipment log Align the guide rails on the replacement power supply with the guide rails in the power supply cavity Firmly push the power supply into the cavity to plug it into the power distribution backplane connectors Replace the four screws and tighten them firmly 6 0 inch pounds Push and hold the spring loaded safety interlock mechanism toward the outer edge of the power supply Plug the AC power cord into the exposed power inlet receptac
181. g Power On Off from the Action menu displays the Power on off dialog This dialog provides commands to remotely power on or power off the server 98 Power on off 21x Operation Option BEL ae Post power up option EMP active O Power EF Allow SIGS Redirect Cancel Help Figure 7 4 Power On Off Dialog Options available in the dialog are Power ON powers on the server Power OFF powers off the server This option is not allowed if the server is configured in RESTRICTED mode for EMP operations Post power up option sets the mode selection of the server to EMP active or BIOS redirection The setting is available after the next power up The default selection is EMP active Cancel exits the Connect dialog without taking any action Help displays the help information for this dialog Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console How to Use Reset Selecting Reset from the Action menu displays the Reset dialog This dialog provides the ability to remotely reset the server with post reset options Operation Option Post reset option T System Reset EMP active Allow BIOS Re direct Cancel Help Figure 7 5 Reset Dialog Options available in the dialog are e System Reset resets the server with the selected post reset options This operation is not allowed if the server is configured in RESTRICTED mode for EMP operations e Post reset option sets the post re
182. g the power cords from the power supplies or wall outlets and remove the top and right side covers See Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Move the jumper from J3H1B pins 3 B C to pins 3 A B to write protect the flash memory device 10 Reinstall the covers plug in the power cords and turn on the server gt NOTE If the system BIOS becomes corrupted during the update process for example a power outage occurs follow the Recovering the BIOS procedure on page 218 Recovering the BIOS Moving the boot option jumper on J3H1D from pins 7 B C to pins 7 A B enables the BIOS flash memory boot recovery mode The BIOS can be corrupted for example when the update procedure is aborted due to a power outage However flash memory contains a protected area that cannot be corrupted Code in this area is used to boot the server from drive A when the BIOS has been corrupted After booting the Flash Update Utility IFLASH is used to automatically recover the BIOS from the BIOS recovery files on the diskette 218 Chapter 16 I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers To recover the BIOS 1 2 3 10 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Turn off the server and unplug the AC power cords from the power supplies or wall outlets Remove the top and right side covers See Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Move the jumper from J3H1D pins 7 B C
183. ge into the slot 2 connector on the CPU baseboard Insert the hook end of the latch bar in the front flange of the right slot guide Close the latch bar by rotating it inward onto the left slot guide Then press in on the middle of the bar until the latch hook catches under the front flange in the left slot guide Reinstall the air baffle as described earlier Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 OM06717 Figure 12 8 Removing a Processor A Im OO D Latch bar Pull tab Latch bar hook Eject insert levers Processor S E C cartridge 149 AD450NX Server System Product Guide DC to DC Converter VRM VRM in connector Provides power for Description J1 Processor 1 Processor core power only J2 Processor 1 and 2 L2 Cache power only J3 Processor 2 Processor core power only J4 Processor 3 Processor core power only J5 Processor 3 and 4 L2 Cache power only J6 Processor 4 Processor core power only Removing a DC to DC Converter VRM See Figure 12 9 1 2 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the air baffle as described earlier Using a small flat bladed screwdriver push the plastic ejector levers on each end of the connector away f
184. ges on page 295 for information about beep codes and error messages 293 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Diskette Drive Activity Light Does Not Light Check the following Are the power and signal cables to the diskette drive properly installed Are all relevant switches and jumpers on the diskette drive set correctly Is the diskette drive properly configured Oooo Is the diskette drive activity light always on If so the signal cable may be plugged in incorrectly If you are using the onboard diskette controller use the SSU to make sure that controller is enabled If you are using an add in diskette controller make sure that the onboard controller is disabled Chapter 5 If the problem persists there may be a problem with the diskette drive I O baseboard or drive signal cable Contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance Hard Disk Drive Activity Light Does Not Light 294 If you have installed one or more hard disk drives in your server check the following Are the power and signal cables to the IDE hard disk drive properly installed Is the SCSI controller board fully seated in the I O baseboard connector Are all relevant switches and jumpers on the hard disk drive and controller board set correctly Is the onboard IDE controller enabled DODO NOTE The hard disk drive activity light on the front panel lights when either an IDE hard disk drive or SCSI device is in use LI Is the
185. gramming the Sensor Data Records To do this turn the server off and disconnect the AC power cords from the server power supplies Wait approximately 30 seconds reconnect the power cords and turn the server on What You Need to Do The FRUSDR Load Utility may be run directly from the Configuration Software CD or from diskettes you create from the CD Before you can run the FRUSDR Load Utility from a diskette you must copy the utility from the Server Configuration Software CD to a DOS bootable diskette See Chapter 2 On site Installation Installing the Server to create an FRUSDR Load Utility diskette gt NOTE If your diskette drive is disabled or improperly configured you must use BIOS Setup to enable it If necessary you can disable the drive after you are done with the FRUSDR utility 103 AD450NX Server System Product Guide How You Use the FRUSDR Load Utility This utility is compatible with ROM DOS Ver 6 22 MS DOS Ver 6 22 and later versions The utility accepts CFG SDR and FRU load files The executable file for the utility is frusdr exe The utility requires the following supporting files e one or more fru files describing the system s field replaceable units e a cfg file describing the system configuration e a sdr file describing the sensors in the system Command Line Format The basic command line format is frusdr h d dmi fru sdr cfg filename cfg p v Command Description f
186. h EMP Console are e Connecting to remote servers e Powering the server on or off e Resetting the server The EMP Console uses three management plug ins to monitor the server e SEL Viewer not available on AD450NX servers e SDR Viewer not available on AD450NX servers e FRU Viewer The EMP Console also has a Phonebook plug in that can be used to create and maintain a list of servers and their phone numbers 91 AD450NX Server System Product Guide How EMP Console Works 92 The EMP shares use of the COM 2 port with the system on the server When the EMP has control of the port the port operates in command mode When the system has control the port operates in console redirect mode When connecting to a server the EMP Console checks to determine the mode of the COM 2 port The following discussion covers how EMP Console functions in each mode e Command mode is the default COM 2 state In this state EMP Console communicates with the server s firmware allowing the client to remotely reset or power the server up or down The client can also view the server s System Event Log SEL Field Replaceable Unit FRU information or Sensor Data Record SDR table not available on AD450NX servers e In console redirect mode EMP Console serves as a PC ANSI terminal window for BIOS console redirection Commands typed in this terminal window are transmitted through BIOS to the server s console and text displayed on the server console is d
187. h grounded outlet 100 120V 7A Apparaten skall anslutas till 200 240V 3 5A jordat uttag nar den ansluts 50 60Hz till ett n tverk OM05925 WARNING Because of chassis airflow disruption the power supply bay should not be vacant for more than five minutes when server power is on Exceeding the five minute limit may cause damage to certain peripheral components Before replacing a power supply in a three power supply configuration you must turn off power to the server and unplug the AC power cord from the power supply that is being replaced Removing a Power Supply A 120 CAUTION If the chassis contains only three power supplies turn off all peripheral devices connected to the server Then turn off the server power with the push button on off switch on the front panel You do not need to unplug the AC power cords from the good power supplies See Figures 10 1 and 10 2 1 Look at the green LEDs on the back of the power supplies to determine which one is defective 2 Unplug the AC power cord from the power inlet receptacle on the defective power supply to release the spring loaded safety interlock mechanism 3 Remove and save the screws that attach the supply to the chassis 4 Grasp the power supply handle and pull the power supply toward you to unplug it from the power distribution backplane 5 Remove the defective power supply and set it aside Chapter 10 Hot swappable Power Supplies Hot Swappin
188. he SDR table must be reprogrammed Upon completing the programming of the FRU and SDR areas the server should be rebooted Note DOS users may alternatively use a instead of the The following information is display if v option is included in the command line The D FRU command may be followed with up to 16 device addresses Thes device addresses are used to view up to 16 different FRU areas instead of the default of displaying the BMC FRU The arguments following the d FRU are in the same order and value as the NVS_TYPE NVS_LUN DEV_BUS and DEV_ADDRESS which are found in the FRU file header in each FRU file The LUN address is optional If the LUN address is used it must start with an L Usage FRUSDR d fru device lun bus addr addr2 etc Example FRUSDR D FRU IMBDEVICE L00 00 CO C2 The configuration file may be used to load multiple FRU and SDR files In the configuration file you may define which FRU and SDR areas are to be programmed Additionally you may request information from the user or ask the user to choose which areas to program To read this area Enter this command line UO Baseboard FRU frusdr d fru IMBDEVICE FF 20 Front Panel FRU frusdr d fru IMBDEVICE 00 22 CPU baseboard FRU frusdr d fru DS1624S 01 98 Top Mem Mod FRU frusdr d fru DS1624S 01 9A Bottom Mem Mod FRU frusdr d fru DS1624S 01 9E Interconnect Backplane FRU frusdr
189. he power and the signal cables from the IDE CD ROM drive Squeeze the tabs on the plastic snap in slide rails toward the drive to release it Pull the drive out of the bay and place it component side up on an antistatic surface Chapter 13 Boot Drives and Removable Media Drives Installing Removing Replacing OM06741 Figure 13 8 IDE CD ROM Drive A IDE CD ROM Drive B Plastic snap in slide rail C Tab D Power cable E ID signal cable 189 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 6 7 Remove and save the four screws and the two snap in slide rails from the drive If you leave the bay empty for proper cooling and airflow you must install a filler panel on the snap on plastic drive bay cover and a stainless steel EMI shield on the bay OM06742 Figure 13 9 Snap in Plastic Slide Rails A IDE CD ROM drive B Tab C Screw D Slide rail Replacing the IDE CD ROM Drive See Figures 13 2 13 8 and 13 9 190 1 2 3 mn SOO H Remove the IDE CD ROM drive from the protective packaging and place it on an antistatic surface Record the model and serial numbers of the drive in your equipment log Set any jumpers and switches on the drive according to the manufacturer s instructions Using two screws of the appropriate size and length not supplied attach each plastic slide rail to the drive Orient the drive so that the slide rails engage in the bay guide rails and push the drive into
190. hen on indicates power supply current is okay Off When off it may indicate the power supply has shutdown because of an over current condition Tools and Supplies You Need e Phillips cross head screwdriver 2 bit e Antistatic wrist strap recommended e Penor pencil Equipment Log Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B Equipment Log to record the model and serial numbers of the server all installed options and any other pertinent information about the server You will need this information when running the SSU 119 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Hot Swapping a Power Supply A In a fully configured server the power system contains four 420 watt autoranging power supplies the fourth one is redundant If a single power supply fails in the redundant power system the yellow power supply failure LED on the front panel turns on You can easily hot swap the defective power supply without turning the server power off However you must unplug the AC power cord from the defective power supply before you can remove the power supply from the server There is a spring loaded safety interlock mechanism beside the AC inlet receptacle on the power supply this interlock ensures that the supply cannot be removed or replaced while the power cord is attached Power supplies are hot swappable only in configurations with four power supplies E Hot swappable HS WARNING CM A A Connect only to a properly eart
191. her ade 275 5 V and 12 V Connector JA 275 5 V Connectors J41 J42 J43 and Ja4 276 3 3 V and 5 V Connector Job 276 20 Power System Description Calculating Power Usage Warnings and Cations iesnas an en HR aa 277 POWER Sy SIM rociar 277 Power Supply Input Voltages u ce ee 278 Power Supply Output MOSER eek 278 Server CUISINE 279 Calculating Power Usage u ee cis 280 21 Back up Battery Replacing Disposing Warnings and Cautions sein ii 283 Tools Eft ell ge TE E 283 Equipment Log ae klaren eier 283 Backup Bt ee eek 284 Replacing the Back up Battery u n ee 285 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages Warnings and Bautlions Sissi ei 287 Resetting the SO uan ds nt ehren 287 Initial Startup of the SV ii de as 287 Checklist o ee realen 287 Running New Application Software nn 288 Checklist nee ea eases arene et 288 After the Server Has Been Running Correctly kk 289 Ghecklist ren ae een 289 More Troubleshooting Procedures a Henn ee enge 290 Preparing the Server for Diagnostic Testing nennen 290 Monitoring POST ee er Reale 290 Verifying Proper Operation of the Server Lobts nn 290 Confirming Loading of the Operating System nn 291 Specific Problems and Corrective Actions AANEREN 291 Power Light Does Not Light en een een ei 291 Server Cooling Fans Do Not Rotate Properly ooooooccccnnccccnnccccccnccnonanoncnnnnnnnanancccnaninos 292 No Characters Appear on RE EE 293 Characters Are Distorted or Incorrect AAR
192. her or not 1t detects one During POST the BIOS automatically detects and tests the keyboard if it is present Locked Power and Reset Switches The power and reset push button switches on the front panel are locked when the server is in the secure mode To exit from the secure mode you must enter your user password Diskette Write Protect If Diskette Write Protect is enabled in Setup it write protects the diskette drive only while the server is in the secure mode To exit from the secure mode you must enter your user password 30 Chapter 1 Introduction to the High performance Server Video Blanking If Video Blanking is enabled in Setup the video display will be off when the server is in the secure mode To exit from the secure mode you must enter your user password 31 2 On site Installation Installing the Server This chapter tells how to e Selecta site e Connect input and output devices e Turn on the server and create installation diskettes from the Server System Configuration Software CD e Read and print a copy of this manual e Exit to DOS A WARNING To avoid personal injury when moving the server from one location to another use only a mechanical assist unit to move it The minimum server configuration weighs about 58 kg 128 Ibs and the maximum one weighs close to 79 kg 175 Ibs Do not attempt to lift or move the server by the handles on the power supplies Selecting a Site The server operates rel
193. horized entry into the hot docking bays lock the doors by 116 turning the key to position B Remove the key and store it in a safe place Installing Hot Swapping Chapter 9 Hot swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives OM06745 OM06773 ive i Hard Disk Dri swapping a Figure 9 5 Hot A Green LED drive power Green LED drive activity C Yellow LED drive fault B 117 10 Hot swappable Power Supplies Hot Swapping This chapter tells how to hot swap a server power supply When the yellow power supply failure LED on the front panel turns on you can determine which power supply is defective by checking the status LEDs on the back of each one The PS LED on the back of the failed power supply will be off You must hot swap it remove and replace it with a good one If the server contains four power supplies you do not need to shut the server down to hot swap a power supply PS power green LED Description on When on indicates power supply is on and working Off When off it may indicate e power supply has failed e power supply is not properly plugged in current green LED Description and action if needed O on W
194. hufar todos los cables de corriente alterna de la pared o desconectar la fuente de alimentaci n INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD Cuando extraiga la tapa del chasis para acceder al interior del sistema siga las siguientes instrucciones 1 Apague todos los dispositivos perif ricos conectados al sistema 2 Apague el sistema presionando el interruptor encendido apagado 3 Desconecte todos los cables de alimentaci n CA del sistema o de las tomas de corriente alterna 4 Identifique y desconecte todos los cables enchufados a los conectores E S o a los puertos situados en la parte posterior del sistema 5 Cuando manipule los componentes es importante protegerse contra la descarga electrost tica ESD Puede hacerlo si utiliza una mu equera antiest tica sujetada a la toma de tierra del chasis o a cualquier tipo de superficie de metal sin pintar 6 No ponga en marcha el sistema si se han extra do las tapas del chasis Despu s de completar las seis instrucciones de SEGURIDAD mencionadas ya puede extraer las tapas del sistema Para ello 1 Desbloquee y extraiga el bloqueo de seguridad de la parte posterior del sistema si se ha instalado uno 2 Extraiga y guarde todos los tornillos de las tapas 3 Extraiga las tapas Para obtener un enfriamiento y un flujo de aire adecuados reinstale siempre las tapas del chasis antes de poner en marcha el sistema Si pone en funcionamiento el sistema sin las tapas bien colocadas puede da ar l
195. iably within the specified environmental limits see page 34 Choose a site that is e Near a grounded power outlet In the United States and Canada this means a NEMA 5 15R outlet for 100 120 V or a NEMA 6 15R outlet for 200 240 V For international sites this means a grounded power outlet applicable for the electrical code of the region A CAUTION Ensure that the power service connection is through a properly grounded outlet e Clean and dust free e Well ventilated and away from sources of heat e Isolated from strong electromagnetic fields and electrical noise caused by electrical devices such as air conditioners large fans large electric motors radio and TV transmitters and high frequency security devices e Spacious enough to provide sufficient room behind and around the server so that you can remove AC power from it by unplugging the power cord from each power supply or wall outlet e Away from sources of vibration or physical shock 33 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Physical Specifications Height 69 85 cm 27 5 inches Width 43 18 cm 17 0 inches Depth 71 12 cm 28 0 inches Weight 58 kg 128 Ibs minimum configuration 79 kg 175 lbs maximum configuration Front clearance 30 5 cm 12 0 inches Side clearance 7 6 cm 3 0 inches Rear clearance 15 2 cm 6 0 inches This is the minimum clearance required for server cooling and airflow additional clearance is required for servicing Environmen
196. ial port 1 COM1 9 pin RS 232 connector PS 2 compatible parallel port LPT 25 pin bidirectional subminiature D connector USB ports O and 1 4 pin connectors Super VGA compatible 15 pin video connector PS 2 compatible serial port 2 COM2 9 pin RS 232 connector PS 2 compatible keyboard port 6 pin connector PS 2 compatible mouse port 6 pin connector Intelligent Chassis Management Bus ICMB port 1 SEMCONNT 6 pin connector Intelligent Chassis Management Bus ICMB port 2 SEMCONN 6 pin connector 37 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Obtaining Power Cords A WARNING Do not attempt to modify or use AC power cords that are not the exact type required Because power cords are not supplied for the server power supplies you must obtain power cords that meet the following criteria The cord must be rated for the available AC voltage and have a current rating that is at least 125 of the current rating of the server The connector that plugs into the wall outlet must be a grounding type plug designed for use in your region It must have certification marks showing certification by an agency acceptable in your region The connector that plugs into the AC receptacle on the server power supply must be an IEC 320 sheet C13 type female connector The cord must be less than 4 5 meters 14 76 feet long and it must be flexible lt HAR gt harmonized or VDE certified cordage to comply with the server safety certifications Turni
197. ification revision level Some OSs require 1 1 for compatibility Select the drive access method for IDE drives Most OSs use logical block addressing LBA However some operating systems may use the cylinder head sector CHS See your OS documentation for further help continued 53 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Advanced Menu continued Feature Pause Before Boot PCI Configurations PCI Device Embedded SCSI A Option ROM Scan Enable Master Latency Timer PCI Devices Option ROM Scan Enable Master Latency Timer IO Device Configuration Serial Port A Base I O Address Interrupt Option Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Default 0020h 0040h 0060h 0080h 00A0h 00C0h OOEOh Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Default 0020h 0040h 0060h 0080h 00A0h 00C0h OOEOh Disabled Enabled Auto 3F8 2F8 3E8 2E8 IRQ3 IRQ4 Description Pause five seconds before booting the OS Additional Setup menus to configure PCI devices Setup items for configuring the specific PCI device Initialize device expansion ROM Enable selected device as a PCI bus master Allot minimum guaranteed time slice for bus master in units of PCI bus clocks Initialize device expansion ROM Enable selected device as a PCI bus master Allot minimum guaranteed time slice for bus master in units of PCI bus clocks Configure serial port A using these options e Disab
198. in an S E C cartridge Front side bus FSB terminator module Memory module Memory terminator module Chapter 1 Introduction to the High performance Server Comment An array of three fans cools and circulates air through the I O baseboard side of the server Two arrays of three fans cool and circulate air through the CPU baseboard side of the server Integrated power supply fans three or four cool and circulate air through the power supplies and the hot docking bays The front panel board provides the user interface to the server The board allows other servers to communicate with this server even while power is down via an Intelligent Chassis Management Bus ICMB Push button switches control power up reset and nonmaskable interrupt NMI functions LEDs indicate power on power supply failure hard drive failure or a fan or other server cooling failure An LCD panel provides information about boot status available number of processors and other server management information Inter integrated circuit bus SCH for diagnostic and intrachassis communication ICMB for interchassis platform management communications Real time clock calendar RTC Front panel controls and indicators LEDs Basic Input Output System BIOS Power on Self Test POST and Setup Utility stored in a flash memory device SCSISelect Utility System Setup Utility SSU Emergency Management Port EMP Utility Field Replacement Unit
199. inside the base next to the other array of fans A CAUTION For proper cooling and airflow make sure that the fan labels face toward the CPU baseboard so that the fans blow air into the chassis 3 Orient the two three fan array and foam housing assembly so that the back is slightly to your right and goes in first as you slide it into the chassis Carefully slide the assembly toward the front of the chassis to properly seat the foam housing flush against the front bulkhead 4 Plug the two fan cables into the appropriate connectors on the SCSI backplane Reinstall the air baffle as described earlier 6 Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Si 141 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Support Panel for Terminator and Memory Modules A small metal panel supports the terminator and memory modules installed on the CPU baseboard You must remove the panel to gain access to the modules Removing the Support Panel See Figure 12 4 1 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines 2 Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the screws from the support panel and set them aside 4 Pull the end of the panel toward you about 45 and slide the tabs on the other end of the panel out of the slots in the chassis bulkhead Set the panel aside Reinstalling the Support Panel See Figure 12 4 1 Orient the support panel
200. interpreted mode of displaying the SEL records determine whether SEL data will be saved to the file as under File Save in binary format or verbose format display the SEL Viewer version information Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run m SEL Manager DD View Settings Help Time Stamp Event Description Pre Init lPre Init Timestamp Lower Critical going low Trigger Lower Critical going low Trigger Reading 0x0000 Tri 0x0000 Tri ee System Setup Utility Figure 5 8 System Event Log Main Window Exiting the SSU Exiting the SSU causes all windows to close 1 Utility Main Window on page 67 Click on Exit or Highlight Exit and press lt Enter gt Exit the SSU by opening the menu bar item File in the SSU Main window See System Setup 79 6 SCSISelect Utility When to Run Each host adapter includes an onboard SCSISelect configuration utility that allows you to configure view the settings of the host adapters and devices in the server e During bootup the server first displays the BIOS banner for the AIC 7880 SCSI host adapter on the I O baseboard e Next the server displays the BIOS banner for the AHA 3940AUW SCSI host adapter on an add in board plugged into a 32 bit PCI slot on the I O baseboard When the BIOS banner for each adapter appears you can run the included SCSISelect utility by pressing lt Ctrl A gt When to Run the SCSISelect Utility Use the SCSISelect utility to
201. ion P O Box 5937 Denver CO 80217 9808 or call in North America 1 800 548 4725 Europe 44 0 1793 431 155 France 44 0 1793 421 777 Germany 44 0 1793 421 333 other Countries 708 296 9333 t Third party brands and names are property of their respective owners Copyright 1998 Intel Corporation All Rights Reserved Quick Reference and Conventions JJ For translated warnings see Appendix C Warnings Part I User s Guide 1 Introduction to the High performance Server 2 On site Installation Installing the Server 3 Power on Self Test Description Running 4 Setup Utility When to Run 5 System Setup Utility When to Run 6 SCSISelect Utility When to Run 7 Emergency Management Port Console How to Use 8 FRU and SDR Load Utility When to Run 9 Hot swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives Installing Hot Swapping 10 Hot swappable Power Supplies Hot Swapping Part Il Service Technician s Guide Safety Guidelines 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling 13 Boot Drives and Removable Media Drives Installing Removing Replacing 14 Power Distribution Backplane Description Voltages 15 SCSI Hot docking Backplane Description SCSI IDs 16 I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers 17 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers AD450NX Server System Product Guide 18 Memory and Memory Terminator Modules Description Adding Memory 19 Interconnect Backplane D
202. ion manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference with his own expense FCC Compliance Statement Product Type DRAASP This Device Complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Intel Corporation 5200 N E Elam Young Parkway Hillsboro OR 97124 6497 Phone 1 800 INTEL4U Electromagnetic Compatibility Notices International COREL JH ee eS Be SE SE az CV CC 1 Di ESS TPAAT RENEE CT COREE A REE CHAT SO L E Ah Old u E COWAITITHA EISEN RMR ST BALIARINIIENDBUEKT English translation of the notice above This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council For Interference VCCI by Information Technology Equipment If this equipment is used in a domestic environment radio disturbance may arise When such trouble occurs the user may be required to take corrective actions Cet appareil num rique respecte les limites bruits radio lectriques applicables aux appareils num riques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme sur le mat riel brouilleur Appareils Num riques NMB 003 dict e par le Ministre Canadian d
203. ion software problems are unresolved Server powers up and it immediately powers down Try the solutions in the order given If you cannot correct the problem contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance Power Light Does Not Light Check the following a a a Is the server operating normally If so the power LED is probably defective or the cable from the front panel to the baseboard is loose Are there other problems with the server If so check the items listed under Server Cooling Fans Do Not Rotate Properly Is the yellow power supply failure LED flashing If so a power supply has failed If all items are correct and problems persist contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance 291 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Server Cooling Fans Do Not Rotate Properly If the server cooling fans are not operating properly server components will be damaged gt NOTE 292 The server contains nine fans arranged in arrays of three and six fans that provide cooling for the server components The integrated fan on each power supply provides more cooling for the SCSI hard disk drives in the hot docking bays In case of cooling problems you cannot access or replace the fans integrated in the power supplies There are no serviceable components in the power supply If the power supply is opened the warranty is voided Check the following OOOocdo DODO O
204. ir baffle as described earlier 7 Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 an Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling OM07154 Figure 12 7 Front Side Bus Terminator Module A Latch bar B Pull tab C Latch bar hook D Eject insert levers E Terminator module assembly 147 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Processor The CPU baseboard supports up to four processors packaged in S E C cartridges CAUTION The processors can be extremely sensitive to ESD and always require careful handling After removing a processor from a protective wrapper or from the CPU baseboard place it on a nonconductive static free surface Do not slide the processor over any surface Removing a Processor See Figure 12 8 1 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines 2 Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 3 Remove the air baffle as described earlier 4 Place your finger under the pull tab of the latch bar and your thumb on top of the bar Then press down on the bar with your thumb while gently pulling back on the tab with your finger to release tension on the latch bar hook 5 Pull the tab end of latch bar toward you to unhook it and open the bar to about 90 6 Slide the bar to your left to unhook it from the slot guide Set the b
205. iscard the used battery according to the manufacturer s instructions 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling This chapter tells how to remove and reinstall the server covers Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 125 Tools and Supplies You Need e Phillips cross head screwdriver 1 bit and 2 bit e Small flat bladed screwdriver e Antistatic wrist strap recommended e Penor pencil Equipment Log Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B Equipment Log to record the model and serial numbers of the server all installed options and any other pertinent information about the server You will need this information when running the SSU Covers The server comes with several removable covers e The top cover provides access to the front panel board and the 3 5 inch IDE or SCSI hard disk boot drive bay You must remove the top cover before you can remove the side covers e The left side cover provides access to the CPU baseboard power distribution backplane and two three fan arrays e The right side cover provides access to the I O baseboard power distribution backplane 3 5 inch boot drive bay 5 25 inch drive bays 3 5 inch diskette drive bay SCSI hot docking backplane and an array of three fans e The doors on the plastic front b
206. isplayed on the EMP Console s terminal window In this mode you can remotely view boot messages access BIOS setup and run DOS text mode applications through the EMP Console s terminal window E lelx File Connect Action Help ala 01 hel al 2 SERVER NAME LINE Direct MODE EMP LINE STATUS Connected Figure 7 1 EMP Console in Command State Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console How to Use PhoenixBIOS 4 8 Release 6 8 Copyright 1985 1998 Phoenix Technologies Ltd All Rights Reserved ASPN 86B 6616 B 9865641525 A45 NX BIOS VERSION BETA 18 FOR EVALUATION ONLY NOT FOR RESALE Build Time 85 84 98 15 19 44 1 Pentium lt R gt II Xeon lt TM gt Processor 466 MHz 66666646K System RAM Passed 6136648K Extended Memory ECC Initialized 6136648K Extended Memory Passed 512K Cache SRAM Passed ATAPI CD ROM HITACHI CDR 8335 Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP SERVER NAME LINE Direct MODE Redirect LINE STATUS Connected Figure 7 2 EMP Console in Redirect State Figure 7 2 shows the EMP Console window in redirect mode with the terminal window The text that appears on the server monitor displays in the Redirect window Availability of the various EMP Console features are determined by two factors the BIOS EMP access mode and if the server s COM 2 port is configured for console redirection The three EMP access modes are disabled pre boot and always active Table 7 1 EMP Console Access Modes Server
207. ist Press lt Esc gt to exit this menu The OS assigns drive letters to these devices in the order displayed Change the sequence and the drive lettering of a device by selecting it with the up and down arrow keys Press lt gt to move it up the list and press lt gt to move it down the list Press lt Esc gt to exit this menu Selects the maximum number of 120 drives that will be assigned a DOS drive letter All timeout values will be multiplied by this number Select enabled when you need to start the IRTOS manually When you hear three beeps POST has stopped Press any key to continue Exit Menu Selections Chapter 4 Setup Utility When to Run The following menu options are available on the Server menu Select an option by using the up or down arrow keys Then press lt Enter gt to execute the option and follow the prompts Option Exit Saving Changes Exit Discarding Changes Load Setup Defaults Load Custom Defaults Save Custom Defaults Discard Changes Save Changes Description Exit Setup and save your changes to CMOS Exit Setup without saving data to CMOS Load default values for all Setup items Load settings from custom defaults Save changes to custom defaults Normally PhoenixBios reads setup settings from CMOS However if CMOS fails it uses custom defaults if you have set them If not it uses factory defaults Load previous values from CMOS for all Setup items Save Setup data to CMOS 61
208. istribution Backplane nen 174 Reinstalling the Power Distribution Backplane oocoonncccccnnnccccocccccccnnnancconnncnananoncnnns 176 Intelligent Chassis Management Bus CMD Board 176 Removing the ICMB Boa 176 Reinstalling the ICMB Board ee dad 176 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 13 Boot Drives and Removable Media Drives Installing Removing Replacing Warnings and CautiOns mina 179 T6ols and Supplies You NEO asocia lana od 179 Equipment LOG EE 179 Boot Hard Disk Drive ae a 180 Installing the Boot Hard Disk Drive ssssssesssesssseernneesserrrntrsserrrrrrrstrrnnrnnnnrsrnrrnnneeent 180 Removing the Boot Hard Disk Drive ooooooooocccccnonacocanoccccnnnnnonanncccnnnnnnnn nn nc ccnnnannnnnn cnn 180 Mass Storage Devices nn ui Ra Heime 182 Installing a Mass Storage Device ANNE 182 Removing a Mass Storage Device ENNEN 186 Diskette DIV camarita it di aia 186 Removing the Diskette Drive ENEE 186 Replacing the Diskette Drive 186 DE CD ROM Driver tee cabiead 188 Removing the IDE CD ROM Drive 188 Replacing the IDE CD ROM Drive ccoo ee 190 14 Power Distribution Backplane Description Voltages Warnings and Gaulions ena 191 Power Distribution Backplane n ee ee 191 CUNA ATOM ne eurer 191 Two speed Fan MOM ao a as a 192 e TEE 192 Power Supply Present and Fault Detechon ENNEN 192 Power Supply Revision Detection nennen 192 InterconnectGableDetect u ck ee 192 Fourth Power Supply Cable Good Detection
209. ive Bay Cover 135 Jig saWwF6am AlrB ale caian aut Hk 139 Two Three fan Array Aesemblies AAA 140 Two Three fan Array Aesembles AAA 141 Support Panel for Memory Modules ANNE 143 Memory LOG NS ee a ees Aeneas ee ecech At 145 Terminator Module sisi el 145 Front Side Bus Terminator Modules en ee 147 Removing a Processor ur tn energie 149 DE 16 DG Convener VM en ee 151 Interconnect Backplane Assemblv Ak 153 Detaching the Mechanical Unit From the Backplane AA 154 Attaching the Mechanical Unit to the Backplane A 155 CPUIBASSUOAIO ern dad sail aed 157 Front Panel gel ee ee 159 Retaining Bracket for Add in Board 161 I O Baseboard Expansion Glots seet 163 Expansion IO Cover teen 163 Installing an Add in Board aristas tati 164 Three fan Array Assembly ee ee 167 VO Riser Gardi art ee a Here est 169 O BAS CRO ANG Sasse en 171 RE e EE 173 Power Disiribution Backplane era e io 175 IG MB BOanC se A N N a Mack AeA Gaon eae 177 Boot Hard Disk Drive es 181 Drive Bay Riller P rels arena en 183 Drive Bay EMI SGhield ANEN 183 Snap in Plastie Slide Ralls 3 0 2 2 ae r neras 184 Mass Storage Device ie une 185 Strain Relief Clips sen erg A Eege 185 Disketle Drive ne A an 187 RI e KETTER EE 189 snap in Plastic Slide Rails 2 h see deeg Ee eee 190 Sal Backplane nenne nk tibia 197 SCSI 68 pin CONNOCION at ta ou rear Racer sean 198 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Tables 15 3 16 1 16 2 16 3 17 1 17 2 18
210. l cable to the drive For a SCSI drive connect the SCSI signal cable to the drive Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 If you installed a SCSI boot hard disk drive run the SCSISelect utility to enable BIOS support for a bootable drive Run the SSU or Setup to specify that the SCSI drive is the boot device For information about running these utilities see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run and Chapter 4 Setup Utility When to Run Removing the Boot Hard Disk Drive See Figure 13 1 1 180 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines SOS lr Chapter 13 Boot Drives and Removable Media Drives Installing Removing Replacing Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Disconnect the power and signal cables from the 3 5 inch boot hard disk drive Remove and save the screw that attaches the drive and carrier assembly to the 3 5 inch boot drive bay Slide the assembly toward the fans to disengage the carrier tabs from the bay Place the assembly carrier side up on a nonconductive static free surface Remove and save the screws that attach the carrier to the drive Remove the carrier from the drive and set the carrier aside Place the drive board side up on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper 10 Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapte
211. le and release the safety interlock OM06747 Figure 10 2 Removing Replacing a Power Supply A moO D AC power inlet receptacle and safety interlock mechanism Screws four Power supply Power supply handle Guide rails Part Il Service Technician s Guide Safety Guidelines 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling 13 Boot Drives and Removable Media Drives Installing Removing Replacing 14 Power Distribution Backplane Description Voltages 15 SCSI Hot docking Backplane Description SCSI IDs 16 I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers 17 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers 18 Memory and Memory Terminator Modules Description Adding Memory 19 Interconnect Backplane Description Connectors 20 Power System Description Calculating Power Usage 21 Back up Battery Replacing Disposing 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages A Regulatory Specifications B Equipment Log C Warnings 123 Safety Guidelines BEFORE YOU REMOVE THE TOP AND SIDE COVERS OF THE SERVER OBSERVE THESE GUIDELINES 1 Turn off all peripheral devices connected to the server 2 Turn off DC power in the server by pressing the push button on off power switch on the front panel of the server 3 Disconnect AC power to the server by unplugging the alternating current AC power cord from
212. led no configuration e _Enabled user configuration e Auto BIOS or OS chooses the configuration e OS Controlled displayed when controlled by the OS Set the base I O address for serial port A Set the interrupt for serial port A continued Advanced Menu continued Feature Serial Port B Base I O Address Interrupt Parallel Port Mode Interrupt Diskette Controller Base I O Address Advanced Chip Set Control Address Bit Permuting Card to Card Interleave Option Disabled Enabled Auto 3F8 2F8 3E8 2E8 IRQ3 IRQ4 Disabled Enabled Auto Output only Bidirectional EPP ECP IRQ5 IRQ7 Disabled Enabled Auto Primary Secondary Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Chapter 4 Setup Utility When to Run Description Configure serial port B using these options e Disabled no configuration e _Enabled user configuration e Auto BIOS or OS chooses the configuration e OS Controlled displayed when controlled by the OS Set the base I O address for serial port B Set the interrupt for serial port B Configure the parallel port using these options e Disabled no configuration e Enabled user configuration e Auto BIOS or OS chooses the configuration e OS Controlled displayed when controlled by the OS Set the mode for the parallel port Set the interrupt for the parallel port Configure the diskette controller using these options
213. let for 200 240 V Chapter 2 Is AC power available at the wall outlet If these items are correct but the problem recurs refer to More Troubleshooting Procedures on page 290 Running New Application Software Problems that occur when you run new application software are usually related to the new software Faulty equipment is much less likely especially 1f other software runs correctly Checklist a DODO OOo I 288 Does the server meet the minimum hardware requirements for the software Refer to the software documentation Is the software an authorized copy If not get one unauthorized copies often do not work If you are running the software from a diskette is it a good copy If you are running the software from a CD is it scratched or dirty If you are running the software from a hard disk drive is the software correctly installed Were all necessary procedures followed and files installed Are the correct device drivers installed Is the software correctly configured for the server Are you using the software correctly the problems persist contact the software vendor s customer service representative Chapter 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages After the Server Has Been Running Correctly Problems that occur after the server hardware and software have been running correctly often indicate equipment failure Many situations that are easy to correct however can also cause such pr
214. mediately powers down check the power supply failure LED f it is lit wait until it goes out before turning the server back on If the LED does not go out you may have to unplug the power cord of each power supply from the AC wall outlets When the LED goes out plug the power cords back into the outlets If the problem persists the power distribution backplane may be defective Contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance Error Codes and Messages The server BIOS displays POST error codes and messages on the video monitor When you turn on the server POST displays messages that provide information about the server If a failure occurs POST emits beep codes that indicate errors in hardware software or firmware Before the video adapter is initialized audible beep codes inform you of errors The errors are logged in the event log and the Extended BIOS Data Area EBDA If POST can display a message on the monitor it causes the speaker to beep twice as the message appears 295 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Port 80h Codes After the video adapter has been successfully initialized after the server is turned on the BIOS indicates the current testing phase during POST by writing a 2 digit hex code to I O location 80h If a port 80h card is installed it displays this 2 digit code on a pair of hex display LEDs The following table contains the port 80h codes displayed during the boot process The table al
215. meets specifications and regulations for safety and EMC Declaration of Compliance We the manufacturer or importer hereby certify that the CE marking on this product indicates that it is in compliance with the European community s EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC Safety Compliance USA Canada UL 1950 CSA 950 95 3 Edition Europe TUVGS Mark to EN60950 Amendments 1 to 3 EU Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC CE Mark International NEMKO to IEC950 Amendments 1 to 4 NEMKO to EN60950 A1 A2 A3Amendments 1 to 3 NEMKO to EMKO TSE 74 SEC 207 94 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC USA FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Subpart B Class A Canada Canadian DOC CRC c 1374 Class A Europe VDE 0871 Level B EU EMC Directive 89 336 EEC CE Mark International CISPR 22 Class A Australia New Zealand AS NZS 3548 Class A Limits using CISPR 22 Class A Japan VCCI Class A ITE using CISPR 22 Class A 303 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Electromagnetic Compatibility Notice USA This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with instruct
216. module from the pin and socket connector of the CPU baseboard Being careful not to touch the components on the memory module slide it out of the slot guides Place the module DIMM side up on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper Reinstalling a Memory Module See Figure 12 5 1 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines 2 Ifthe memory module support panel is in place remove it as described earlier 3 Being careful not to touch the components on the memory module remove it from its protective wrapper Place the module DIMM side up on a nonconductive static free surface 4 Record the serial number of the memory module in your equipment log gt NOTE When you install a memory module in the upper slot connector next to the VRM and slot 2 processor connectors install the module DIMM side up When you install a memory module in the lower slot connector next to the bottom edge of the CPU baseboard install the module DIMM side down 5 Grasp the memory module by the eject insert levers and carefully slide it into the slot guides until the levers engage with the flanges in front of the guides 6 Simultaneously rotate the levers inward until they are flush with the edge of the module to seat the pin and socket connector of the module into the pin and socket connector of the CPU baseboard 7 Reinstall the support panel for the memory modules as described earlier
217. moved an ISA add in board run the SSU to configure the system For information about running this utility see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run 165 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Three fan Array Assembly The three fan array provides cooling for the I O baseboard side of the server The assembly consists of a rubber housing mounted inside a metal housing The rubber housing contains three fans connected to a common power connector Removing the Three fan Array Assembly See Figure 12 19 1 2 P Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Disconnect the power cable of the three fan array from the SCSI backplane Remove and save the two screws from the metal fan housing Remove the three fan array assembly by pulling the back tabs on the metal housing out of the slots in the chassis center bulkhead Set the assembly aside Remove the defective three fan array from the metal housing Set the metal housing aside and discard the three fan array Reinstalling the Three fan Array Assembly See Figure 12 19 1 Place the metal housing grille side down on a flat surface 2 With the power cable side of the new three fan array facing up place the rubber housing inside the metal housing CAUTION For proper cooling and airflow make sure that the fan labels face toward the VO ba
218. mpatible with an IBM PC AT or PC XT system except for an 8 bit drop card that fits only in an 8 bit PC XT connector One PCI slot shares a common chassis I O expansion slot with the ISA slot you can use the slot for either PCI or the ISA but not both CAUTION Do not overload the I O baseboard by installing add in boards that draw excessive current For expansion slot current limitations see Chapter 20 Power System Description Calculating Power Usage Add in boards can be extremely sensitive to ESD and always require careful handling After removing the board from the protective wrapper or from the baseboard place it component side up on a nonconductive static free surface Do not slide the board over any surface amp NOTE If you are installing or removing an ISA add in board you must run the SSU to reconfigure the server Running the SSU is optional for a PCI add in board Installing an Add in Board See Figures 12 16 12 17 and 12 18 1 2 162 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the retaining bracket for add in boards as described earlier Select the appropriate 16 bit ISA 32 bit PCI or 64 bit PCI expansion slot Remove and save the expansion slot cover Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling
219. n CPU baseboard PLD ISP serial data in HSBP PLD ISP serial data out Enables ISP chain on HSBP ISP serial clock Drive door intrusion detect IPMB EC data Power good indicates when power is stable Ground 5 V standby power Reset to power distribution backplane 5 V standby power Ground Front panel DC clock IPMB EC clock Front panel DC data Ground Not connected Ground Resets microcontroller on HSBP Ground Not used reserved Not used reserved Tells power supplies to turn on ISP mode signal Ground Ground Power supply feedback sense line Power supply feedback sense line Ground Power supply feedback sense line Ground Ground Not connected Not connected 267 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Interconnect Backplane Power Connectors The three power connectors on the interconnect backplane receive power from the power distribution backplane These connectors provide 5 V 3 3 V 12 V 12 V and ground to the interconnect backplane It distributes this power to the I O and CPU baseboards The following table describes the pinouts for the three power connectors and the wire colors of the cables that plug into them from the power distribution backplane Pin O DON OA fF WwW N a Oo Set N Signal 5 V GROUND 5 V GROUND 5 V GROUND 5 V GROUND 5 V GROUND 12 V GROUND Color RED BLACK RED BLACK RED BLACK RED BLACK RED BLACK YELLOW BLACK Pin 13 14 15 16
220. n it tests for the presence of each mass storage device installed in the server As each device is checked its activity light should turn on briefly Check for the following U Does the diskette drive activity light turn on briefly If not refer to Diskette Drive Activity Light Does Not Light on page 294 LI If there is a hard disk drive or a SCSI device installed in the server does the drive activity light on the front panel turn on briefly If not refer to Hard Disk Drive Activity Light Does Not Light on page 294 gt NOTE 290 For information about the controls and indicators see Chapter 1 Chapter 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages Confirming Loading of the Operating System Once the server boots up the operating system prompt appears on the screen The prompt varies according to the operating system If the operating system prompt does not appear refer to Initial Startup of the Server on page 287 Specific Problems and Corrective Actions This section provides possible solutions for the following specific problems Power light does not light Server cooling fans do not rotate or rotate slowly No characters appear on screen Characters on the screen appear distorted or incorrect No beep or incorrect beep pattern emitted Activity light on the diskette drive does not light Activity light on the hard disk drive does not light Activity light on the CD ROM drive does not light Applicat
221. n memory modules For instance when installing 16 DIMMs in the system the quantities should be divided such that eight fill the first two banks of one module and eight more fill the same two banks in the second module See the DIMM interleave configurations in Figures 18 1 through 18 4 253 AD450NX Server System Product Guide OM08100 Figure 18 1 4 1 Interleave With Four DIMMs A Bank A J1 J4 populated C Bank C J9 J12 empty B Bank B J5 J8 empty D Bank D J13 J16 empty OM08101 Figure 18 2 4 1 Interleave With Eight DIMMs A Bank A J1 J4 populated C Bank C J9 J12 empty B Bank B J5 J8 populated D Bank D J13 J16 empty 254 Chapter 18 Memory and Memory Terminator Modules Description Adding Memory OM08102 Figure 18 3 4 1 Interleave With 12 DIMMs A Bank A J1 J4 populated C Bank J9 J12 populated B Bank B J5 J8 populated D Bank D J13 J16 empty OM08103 Fig
222. n off system AC power To remove AC power from the system you must unplug each AC power cord from the wall outlet or power supply SAFETY STEPS Whenever you remove the chassis covers to access the inside of the system follow these steps 1 Turn off all peripheral devices connected to the system 2 Turn off the system by using the push button on off power switch on the system 3 Unplug all AC power cords from the system or from wall outlets 4 Label and disconnect all cables connected to I O connectors or ports on the back of the system 5 Provide some electrostatic discharge ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strap attached to chassis ground of the system any unpainted metal surface when handling components 6 Do not operate the system with the chassis covers removed After you have completed the six SAFETY steps above you can remove the system covers To do this 1 Unlock and remove the padlock from the back of the system if a padlock has been installed 2 Remove and save all screws from the covers 3 Remove the covers For proper cooling and airflow always reinstall the chassis covers before turning on the system Operating the system without the covers in place can damage system parts To install the covers 1 Check first to make sure you have not left loose tools or parts inside the system 2 Check that cables add in boards and other components are properly installed 3 Attach the covers to
223. nect your keyboard mouse monitor and other peripheral devices after a qualified service technician installs internal options See Figure 2 2 Keyboard and Mouse Monitor Other Devices Connect the signal cable of a PS 2 compatible keyboard or mouse to either one of the 6 pin miniature Deutsche Industrie Norm DIN connectors on the server back panel The BIOS detects and initializes the keyboard and mouse ports accordingly Each port is overcurrent protected by a 1 ampere positive temperature coefficient PTC resistor Connect the signal cable of the video monitor to the 15 pin connector of the Super VGA port on the back panel Connect other external peripheral devices by following the manufacturer s documentation The back panel also provides two serial ports a parallel port and two USB ports The back of the chassis provides two Intelligent Chassis Management Bus ICMB ports Io onm o oo u gt Chapter 2 On site Installation Installing the Server DCD fun nn 0 0 0 un OCH OOO0O 00000 00000000000 OM06193 Figure 2 2 Server UO Panel PS 2 compatible ser
224. nection No connection DA2 DS3P_L GND 231 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 12 Connector Pin Signal CLK GND DATA Front Panel Connector Pin Now o 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 232 Signal GND Ground VCC_STDBY ISP_SCLK ISP_SDI ISP_FPC_EN_L ISP_MODE ISP_FPC_SDO VCC_STDBY GND COM2_TO_FP_EN COM2_TO_SIO_EN A XIMB_SOUT_EN VCC_STDBY RESERVED SIN_TTL_COM2 SIN_TTL_XIMB SOUT_TTL_COM2 SOUT_TTL_XIMB RESERVED GND DCD_TTL_FP DSR_TTL_FP CTS_TTL_FP RI_TTL_FP GND VCC_STDBY RTS_TTL_FP DTR_TTL_FP GND key position Pin 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 Signal 5V GND FAN_FAILED_L SPEAKER_DATA INTRUSION_L RESERVED GND BMC_TO_FPC_RST_CMD PROC_RESET_L SYS_RESET_STATE RST_SFC_L SECURE_MODE_BMC HARD_RESET FP_NMI_SWT_L RESERVED GND PWR_CNTRL_SFC_L PWR_CNTRL_RTC_L PWR_GOOD PS_PWR_ON GND 12C_ CEL_CONNECT_FPC 12C_CEL_CONNECT_BMC_A 12C_ FPC_SCL 12C_FPC_SDA GND RESERVED 12C_BACKUP_SCL 12C_ BACKUP_SDA GND Legacy Connector Chapter 16 I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers The legacy connector on the I O baseboard provides the signals for the external legacy VGA serial parallel mouse and keyboard peripheral ports Pin Signal Al VCC_STDBY A2 KB_DATA A3 KB_CLK A4 5V A5 SOUT_TTL_XIMB A6 PP_SLCT A7 PP_P
225. nector Signal Section D amp E Signal Pin Signal Pin X1HSTBN_L D1 GND E1 X1HSTBP_L D2 GND E2 GND D3 X1CLKFB E3 X1XSTBP_L D4 GND E4 GND D5 MIOC_INTREQ_L E5 X1RSTFB_L D6 GND E6 GND D7 X1RST_L E7 X1RSTB_L D8 GND E8 GND D9 X1BLK_L E9 RSVD D10 GND E10 GND D11 RSVD E11 RSVD D12 GND E12 GND D13 RSVD E13 RSVD D14 GND E14 RSVD D15 RSVD E15 X1lB_L D16 GND E16 RSVD D17 RSVD E17 RSVD D18 GND E18 GND D19 CPU_SLP_L E19 RSVD D20 GND E20 RSVD D21 RSVD E21 RSVD D22 GND E22 RSVD D23 ISP_EN_L E23 ISP_MODE D24 GND E24 XOHSTBN_L D25 GND E25 continued 248 Chapter 17 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Expander Bus Connector Signal Section D amp E continued Signal Pin Signal Pin XOHSTBP_L D26 GND E26 GND D27 XOCLKFB E27 XOXSTB_L D28 GND E28 GND D29 RSVD E29 XORSTB_L D30 GND E30 GND D31 XORST_L E31 XORSTFB_L D32 GND E32 GND D33 XOBLK_L E33 RSVD D34 GND E34 GND D35 FERR_L E35 RSVD D36 GND E36 GND D37 INTR_3V E37 12C_GLOBAL_SCL D38 GND E38 IO_PWRGD D39 CIB_INTO E39 XOIB_L D40 GND E40 GND D41 BMC_SPI_BUS 4 E41 BMC_SPI_BUS 2 D42 GND E42 GND D43 RSVD E43 INIT_3V_L D44 GND E44 PICD 0 D45 PICD 1 E45 IO_TRST_L D46 GND E46 STOP_CLK_L D47 PIC_CLK E47 RSVD D48 GND E48 Expander Bus Connector Power Section 3 3 V Connectors J21A B C amp D Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal P1A1 3 3V P1B1 GND P1C1 3 3V P1D1 GND P1E1 GND P1A2 3 3V P1B2 GND P1C2 3 3V P1D2 GND P1E2 GND P1A3 3
226. nforming to the SCSI Accessed Fault Tolerant Enclosures SAF TE specification Removing the SCSI Backplane See Figure 12 22 1 2 10 11 12 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Label and remove the SCSI hard disk drives from the hot docking drive bays Place the drives on a nonconductive static free surface or store them in antistatic protective wrappers Label and disconnect the three fan cables from the connectors on top of the SCSI backplane Disconnect the two wire door sensor cable from the connector on top of the SCSI backplane Disconnect the power distribution cables and the signal cable from the SCSI backplane connectors Disconnect the signal cables from SCSI channels A and B Remove the screws from the retaining bracket mounted on the right side of the hot docking bays and set them aside Remove the bracket and set it aside Grasp the left edge of the backplane and slide it to the right about 1 8 inch until it stops Grasp the right and left edges of the backplane and pull it straight back very carefully to remove it from the plastic right angled standoffs on the hot docking bay Place the backplane on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper Reinstalling the SCSI Backplane 172 See Figure 12 22 1 2 DRAN 10 Remove
227. ng on Your Server A WARNING The push button on off power switch on the front panel of the server does not turn off the AC power To remove AC power from the server you must unplug each power cord from each power supply or wall outlet Make sure all external devices such as a video monitor keyboard and mouse optional have been connected 2 Remove drive protection cards if present from the removable media drives 3 Turn on your video monitor 4 For each power supply present in the server plug the female end of a power cord into the power supply input receptacle on the back of the chassis your server may be configured with either three or four power supplies gt NOTE To plug in a power cord push and hold the spring loaded safety interlock mechanism toward the edge of the power supply Then plug the power cord into the exposed inlet receptacle and release the safety interlock 5 For each power supply present in the server plug the power cord into a properly grounded 38 power outlet See page 33 for power outlet requirements moou gt Chapter 2 On site Installation Installing the Server OCT fu un u um un u m u m u COOC rei o CO
228. nt The default boot device is at SCSI ID 0 with logical unit number LUN 0 To specify a different boot device choose a different SCSI ID 0 through 7 on 8 bit adapters O through 15 on 16 bit adapters If the boot device has multiple logical units you must also specify the boot LUN It can be 0 through 7 on 8 bit or 16 bit adapters If you disable Multiple LUN Support in the Advanced Configuration menu specifying a number here has no effect SCSI Device Configuration Menu Feature SCSI Device ID Initiate Sync Negotiation Maximum Sync Transfer Rate Enable Disconnection Initiate Wide Negotiation Send Start Unit Command Include in BIOS Scan Option Comment 0 15 yes When yes the SCSI host adapter initiates synchronous no negotiation with the SCSI device When no the adapter does not initiate synchronous negotiation However if the device initiates synchronous negotiation the adapter always responds 40 0 The host adapter supports synchronous data transfer rates 32 0 up to the Fast SCSI maximum rate of 20 megatransfers sec 26 8 or 40MB sec 20 0 yes When yes the host adapter lets the SCSI device disconnect no from the SCSI bus When no the adapter does not allow the device to disconnect from the bus If two or more devices are connected to the adapter leave this option set to yes yes When yes this option allows wide SCSI hard drives to no achieve 2 bytes per transfer yes No effect if the BIOS
229. nued 263 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 264 Memory Module Connector D 4 E continued Signal MD17_L GND MD20_L GND MD25_L GND MD29 L GND MD32_L GND Pin D51 D52 D53 D54 D55 D56 D57 D58 D59 D60 Signal VCC MD19_L VCC MD23_L VCC MD27_L vcc MD30_L VCC MD35_L Pin E51 E52 E53 E54 E55 E56 E57 E58 E59 E60 19 Interconnect Backplane Description Connectors This chapter describes the interconnect backplane Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 125 Interconnect Backplane The interconnect backplane connects the CPU and V O baseboards together via the expander buses The backplane provides power to the baseboards from the power distribution system Operating at 100 MHz the primary and secondary expander buses can provide peak transfers at a data rate of 400 MB per second The bidirectional and synchronous expander bus uses a full split transaction protocol Each transaction consists of a request and completion phase The No Wait State protocol of the bus guarantees high bus efficiency The interconnect backplane provides e 400 MB second bandwidth per expander bus at 100 MHz bus frequency e cableless interface between CPU and I O baseboards e power distribution to the CPU and I O baseboards e interfac
230. oard Disk Controllers Group 0n Board Communication Devices Group Floppy Drives Group Floppy Drive A Options Floppy Drive B Options IDE Devices Group Choice No choices Memory Figure 5 4 Configuration Window 72 OK Cancel Lx Help Le Resource Use System Resource Usage Clicking on the Resource Use button in the Configuration window displays the System Resource Usage window This window shows what resources each device is consuming This information is useful for choosing resources if a conflict occurs Devices can be organized according to the resources you want to examine using the options in the Resource section of the screen The resource information can also be written to a plain text file though this window Relburce List 0 1 3 4 6 gt 8 9 Baseboard Baseboard Baseboard Baseboard Baseboard Baseboard Baseboard Baseboard system System system System System System System System Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run System R Board Board Board Board Board Board Board Board PCI Card Bus 00 Dev OF PCI Card Bus 00 Dev 12 Resource IRQ DMA O Ports O Memory All Z f d d Timer Chipset Serial Port 2 Configuration Serial Port 1 Configuration On Board Floppy Controller Parallel Port Configuration RTC ACPI SCI Interrupt Ethernet Controller Z Ethernet Controller Multifunction Controller USB Controller
231. oblems Checklist O If you are running the software from a diskette try a new copy of the software Q If you are running the software from a CD try a different CD to see if the problem occurs on all CDs Q If you are running the software from a hard disk drive try running it from a diskette If the software runs correctly there may be a problem with the copy on the hard disk drive Reinstall the software on the hard disk drive and try running it again Make sure all the necessary files are installed LI If the problems are intermittent there may be a loose cable dirt in the keyboard if keyboard input is incorrect a marginal power supply or other random component failures LI If you suspect that a transient voltage spike power outage or brownout might have occurred reload the software and try running it again For example symptoms of voltage spikes include a flickering video monitor unexpected server reboots and the server does not respond to user commands gt NOTE If you are getting random errors in your data files they may be getting corrupted by voltage spikes on your power line If you are experiencing any of the above symptoms that might indicate voltage spikes on the power line you may want to install a surge suppressor between the power outlet and the server power cord Q If the problem recurs after you have checked and corrected all the above items refer to More Troubleshooting Procedures on page 290 LI If
232. odem or directly connected to a serial cable Direct Connect Configuration A null modem serial cable is needed Connect one end of the cable to the COM 2 port of server and the other to a port on the client machine Modem Configuration On the client EMP Console uses the Windows Application Program Interface API to determine if a modem is connected and available The EMP Console does not configure the modem it should be preconfigured through Windows For modem support the server must use a Hayes compatible modem that supports a baud rate of 19 2k The modem must be on the NT Hardware Compatibility List provided by Microsoft The server modem must be set in auto answer mode for EMP Console to be able to connect to it Setting Up the Server for the EMP 94 To use the EMP you must configure the server s BIOS with specific settings These settings are found in the BIOS Server menu and the Console Redirection submenu The BIOS settings section found earlier in this document shows all the available options This section focuses on the settings that must be configured in order to use the EMP Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console How to Use Server Menu All EMP related settings occur in the Server main menu Change only the items below all other default settings should remain the same EMP Password Switch amp EMP Password Anytime an attempt to initiate a connection is made a prompt for the user password appears If no EMP pa
233. om the Backplane Reinstalling the Interconnect Backplane Assembly See Figure 12 10 1 Orient the interconnect backplane housing so that the small end of the slots in the housing face downward and place it on a flat surface 2 Orient the mechanical unit so that the crank faces away from you and the tabs face toward the slots in the housing 3 Insert the tabs of the unit in the slots in the housing and push down on the unit to seat the tabs in the slots 154 Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling OM07155 Figure 12 12 Attaching the Mechanical Unit to the Backplane 4 Position the mechanical unit side of the assembly over the holes in the center bulkhead of the chassis 5 Attach the unit to the bulkhead with the two captive screws and tighten them to 8 0 inch pounds 6 Turn the crank clockwise to just engage the interconnect backplane connectors with the connectors on the I O and CPU baseboards Do not tighten all the way yet 7 When the backplane stops firmly turn the crank clockwise again until the connector halves on the CPU baseboard side are closed If an air gap is visible between the connector halves on the VO baseboard side squeeze the connector halves together CAUTION The server may not function properly if you leave an air gap greater than 060 inches between the interconnect backplane connectors and the I O and CPU baseboard connectors 8 Connect the signal cable the red stripe faces
234. om the firmware update diskettes you must make them MS DOS bootable You must have MS DOS version 6 00 or greater installed on C DOS gt NOTE Please review the firmware release notes distributed with the firmware update package before attempting to update the firmware of any microcontroller 219 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Boot Sequence The VO baseboard provides the server with a variety of methods for detecting and booting an operating system The BIOS scans devices and user configurable option slots in a specific sequence Knowing the precise sequence the BIOS detects sets up and boots assists in defining the server configuration Location Bus J1F2 ISA J2A1 ISA J1F1 IDE J2H1 IDE P1 Primary PCI J1H2 Primary PCI P2 Primary PCI U3D1 Primary PCI U3G2 Primary PCI P3 Secondary PCI P4 Secondary PCI P5 Secondary PCI P6 Secondary PCI U4D1 Secondary PCI P7 64 Bit PCI P8 64 Bit PCI P9 64 Bit PCI P10 64 Bit PCI P11 64 Bit PCI 1 Install user supplied video adapters only in slots P1 or P2 220 IDSEL None None None None 25 26 27 28 Comment Diskette Drive Compatibility Legacy Boot Slot 1 Primary IDE Secondary IDE Expansion Slot On board SCSI Expansion Slot On board Video PIIX4 Component Expansion Slot Expansion Slot Expansion Slot Expansion Slot PID Component Expansion Slot Expansion Slot Expansion Slot Expansion Slot Expansion Slot Chapter 16 I O Baseboard Descrip
235. on Software CD to diskettes and follow the instructions in the README TXT of diskette one See Chapter 2 On site Installation Installing the Server to create a set of SSU diskettes Only diskette one of the set must be DOS bootable gt NOTE If your diskette drive is disabled or improperly configured you must use the flash resident Setup utility to enable it so that you can use the SSU If necessary you can disable the drive after you exit the SSU Information entered using the SSU overrides any entered using Setup Running the SSU 64 Running the SSU Locally Running the ssu bat file provided on the SSU media starts the SSU If the server boots directly from the SSU media the ssu bat file runs automatically If it boots from a different media the SSU can be started manually or by another application When the SSU starts in the local execution mode the default mode the SSU accepts input from the keyboard and or mouse The SSU presents a VGA based Graphical User Interface GUI on the primary monitor The SSU runs from writable nonwritable removable and nonremovable media If you run the SSU from nonwritable media all your preference settings will be lost because you cannot save them The SSU supports the ROM DOS V6 22 operating system It can run on other ROM DOS compatible operating systems but they are not supported The SSU will not operate from a DOS box running under an operating system such as Windows Running
236. on the User password button 2 Enter the old password in the first field 3 Enter the new password in the second field or leave it blank to clear the password 4 Verify the password by entering it again in the second field or leave it blank to clear the password To Set the Administrator Password 1 Click on the Administrator password button 2 Enter the password in the first field 3 Verify the password by entering it again in the second field To Change or Clear the Administrator Password 1 Click on the Administrator password button 2 Enter the old password in the first field 3 Enter the new password in the second field or leave it blank to clear the password 4 Verify the password by entering it again in the second field or leave it blank to clear the password Security Options Under this window you can set the other security options e Hot Key set a key sequence that when pressed will drop the server into secure mode e Lock Out Timer set an interval that if no activity takes place during it will drop the server into secure mode e Secure Boot Mode force the server to boot directly into secure mode e Video Blanking turn off the video when the server is in secure mode e Floppy Write control access to the diskette drive while the server is in secure mode e Reset Power Switch Locking control the power and reset buttons while the server is in secure mode 76 Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run
237. onitors failures and voltage margining in the server The 5 V standby voltage provides power for the bus and it is available even when the server power is off Power Supply Present and Fault Detection A port on the PC bus monitors the presence and fault lines of each power supply When the presence detect line is low the power supply is present When the fault detect line is high a fault condition has occurred in the power supply To clear the fault you must remove and reapply AC power to the power supply Power Supply Revision Detection When the revision detect signal is asserted HIGH it indicates that all present supplies are 420 watt autoranging supplies Desertion of the signal does not imply insufficient power capability but indicates that some configurations could overload the supplies The signal is monitored via a port on the private PC bus Interconnect Cable Detect To prevent the server from being operated when the interconnect power cables are disconnected a cable detect circuit senses the 12 V on two of the three cables The third cable supplies 12 V to the interconnect backplane If the sense line of one cable is high that cable is missing If the sense lines of both cables are high at least two of the three interconnect power cables are missing If the sense lines of both cables are low all three cables are installed The cables can only be sensed after power is applied Server management firmware monitors the cable detec
238. onnectors on the hot docking backplane provide control signals and power for up to 12 wide fast 3 5 inch SCA type SCSI hard disk drives The backplane receives control signals from an Adaptec 3940AUWD host adapter installed in a PCI slot on the I O baseboard It gets power through two multiple conductor cables connected to the power distribution backplane The temperature sensor on the hot docking backplane provides temperature information to other devices in the server through enclosure service messages 195 AD450NX Server System Product Guide The hot docking backplane power control provides powering down of a drive when a failure is detected and reported to the SCSI bus through enclosure service messages When a new drive is inserted in an SCA connector the power control waits a short time for the drive to become fully seated and then applies power to the drive Power control also lets you insert and store a spare drive inan SCA connector When a drive fails the spare drive can be put into service SCSI ID Configurations 196 The SCSI chip on the hot docking backplane uses the SAF TE protocol to communicate with the VO baseboard Because this chip uses SCSI ID 6 other SCSI devices cannot use this ID address For reference record in your equipment log the SCSI IDs of the devices SCSI ID IDO ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 ID5 SCSI Bus A SCA Connector J10 J11 J12 J13 J14 J15 SCSI Bus B SCSI ID SCA Connector IDO J20 ID1 J21 ID2 J2
239. ons Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 125 SCSI Hot docking Backplane The WideUltra SCSI hot docking backplane supports hot swapping of SCA type SCSI drives managing the enclosure chassis and monitoring server functions conforming to the SCSI Accessed Fault Tolerant Enclosures SAF TE specification The backplane provides two independent SCSI channels six drives per channel 12 SCA 2 connectors for SCA type SCSI hard disk drives active terminators that terminate the backplane end of the SCSI bus SCSI 3 compliant power control for each drive that automatically powers down a slot when a drive failure is detected and reported or a drive is removed when a new drive is inserted the power control waits a few moments and then applies power to the new drive three light emitting diodes LEDs for each drive power LEDs indicate the drives are receiving power activity LEDs indicate the drives are being accessed drive fault LEDs indicate the failure status of each drive during server initialization they flash for one second intrachassis DC bus PC bus temperature sensor for each microcontroller three 12 V connectors for fans with tachometers interchassis DC bus support per SAF TE specification serial EEPROM for nonvolatile information storage The SCA 2 c
240. ons e Mode 4 timings e transfer rates up to 33 MB sec e buffering for PCI IDE burst transfers e master slave IDE mode Chapter 16 I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Server Management SM During normal operation SM receives information about the status of the server SM also monitors the power supply voltages and operating temperature of the server If SM determines that the server is not operating within specified limits it attempts to notify a supervisor or an administrator about the condition of the server The microcontrollers on the I O baseboard hot docking backplane power distribution backplane and front panel board implement the server management features Front Panel Controller FPC Where located on the front panel board What it manages e server power control consolidation from several sources push button power signal from the front panel connector real time clock RTC server monitor module SMM if installed commands from the Intelligent Platform Management Bus IPMB e power and reset switch interfaces e fault LEDs e chassis intrusion switch e chassis intrusion detection and reporting e chassis and I O baseboard ID Field Replacement Unit FRU inventory interface e server hard reset generation e server power fault indication e Intelligent Chassis Management Bus ICMB bridge device e RS 232 connection e LCD interface 211 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 212
241. ont panel OA OA OA 250 mA DA DA 0A 170 mA OA OA Total I O 0 2A 28A 0 7A 45 32 A OA 6 03 A 10mA 155 mA OA 1 2A baseboard Total Current CPU 7 2 A 59 8 A 1 5A 51 5 A 0 2 A 34 5 A 10 mA 155mA OA 1 2A and UO baseboards Total Power CPU 23 76W 197 3W 7 5 W 257 6W 2 4W 414 4W 0 05 W 0 78 W DW 14 4W and UO baseboards oN o Om a 0 Minimum server configuration one idle processor two VRMs four processor termination modules two memory modules with 128 MB DRAM no UO adapter cards no front panel no I O riser card no keyboard no mouse no video no parallel port connections and no bus activity Maximum server configuration four 65 W processors and their associated VRMs operating at 80 efficiency keyboard mouse video parallel port connected two memory modules with 8 GB DRAM and all I O adapter slots filled See notes 3 8 Current must not exceed 7 58 A 25 W per PCI slot or 23 A total for all PCI expansion slots on 3 3 V Current must not exceed 5 A 25 W per PCI slot or 41 A total for all expansion slots on 5 V Current must not exceed 2 A per ISA slot or 41 A total for all expansion slots on 5 V Current must not exceed 500 mA per PCI or ISA slot or 6 A total for all expansion slots on 12 V Current must not exceed 100 mA per slot or 1 2 A total for all expansion slots on 12 V These values are included for reference only They are not included in the maximum configuration requirements 279 AD450NX Server System Pro
242. os componentes del sistema Para instalar las tapas 1 Aseg rese primero de no haber dejado herramientas o componentes sueltos dentro del sistema 2 Compruebe que los cables las placas adicionales y otros componentes se hayan instalado correctamente 3 Incorpore las tapas al chasis mediante los tornillos extra dos anteriormente tens ndolos firmemente 4 Inserte el bloqueo de seguridad en el sistema y bloqu elo para impedir que pueda accederse al mismo sin autorizaci n 5 Conecte todos los cables externos y los cables de alimentaci n CA al sistema contin a Appendix C Warnings ADVERTENCIAS Espanol continua Si el sistema ha estado en funcionamiento el microprocesador y el disipador de calor pueden estar a n calientes Tambi n conviene tener en cuenta que en el chasis o en el tablero puede haber piezas cortantes o punzantes Por ello se recomienda precauci n y el uso de guantes protectores Existe peligro de explosi n si la pila no se cambia de forma adecuada Utilice solamente pilas iguales o del mismo tipo que las recomendadas por el fabricante del equipo Para deshacerse de las pilas usadas siga igualmente las instrucciones del fabricante El sistema est dise ado para funcionar en un entorno de trabajo normal Escoja un lugar e Limpio y libre de part culas en suspensi n salvo el polvo normal e Bien ventilado y alejado de fuentes de calor incluida la luz solar directa e Alej
243. ostatic discharge ESD and ESD protection ESD can damage disk drives add in boards and other components This server can withstand normal levels of environmental ESD while you are hot swapping SCSI hard disk drives and power supplies However we recommend doing all procedures in this manual only at an ESD workstation If one is not 125 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 126 available you can provide some ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strap attached to chassis ground of the server any unpainted metal surface when handling components Handling boards and modules Boards and modules can be extremely sensitive to ESD and always require careful handling After removing a board or module from a protective wrapper or from the server place the board or module component side up on a nonconductive static free surface If you place the I O baseboard on a conductive surface the back up battery leads may short out If they do this will result in a loss of CMOS data and will drain the battery Do not slide a board or module over any surface Cooling and airflow Operating the server with the top and side covers removed can damage the components inside it For proper cooling and airflow always replace the covers and air baffles before turning on the server Back up battery Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the equipment manufacturer D
244. ot slide the baseboard over any surface Removing the I O Baseboard See Figure 12 21 1 12 13 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Label and disconnect all internal cables connected to the add in boards installed in the expansion slots Remove the retaining bracket for the add in boards as described earlier Remove the add in boards as described earlier Remove the I O riser card as described earlier Label and disconnect all internal cables connected to the baseboard Remove the air baffle as described earlier Remove the two three fan array assemblies as described earlier Disconnect the interconnect backplane from the CPU and I O baseboards as described earlier Remove and save the screws that attach the I O baseboard to the center bulkhead of the chassis Pull the board toward you to unsnap it from the snap on standoffs Place the board on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper Reinstalling the I O Baseboard See Figure 12 21 1 2 A 170 Remove the I O baseboard from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one Position the baseboard over the snap on and threaded standoffs on the center bulkhead of the chassis Press the baseboard onto the snap on standoffs and insert the screws loosely into the threaded stan
245. ovides maximum performance across sequential cache line accesses the following rules must be followed e All ABP rules above must be followed e Two memory modules must used and corresponding banks must be identically populated with DIMMs of the same size and type Before allowing the processors to come out of reset server management firmware scans the presence detect bits of all DIMMs installed on the memory modules If they are 50 ns DIMMs then server management changes the value of the chipset s DRAM speed mode bit The default value on this bit is a high voltage level which corresponds to 60 ns timings changing the value to a low voltage level places this bit in the 50 ns mode Changing the value of the bit can only be effected by software and it must be before the processors come out of reset If the bit changes while a memory access is in process the results are unpredictable After deciding the value of the bit and making any necessary changes server management may proceed with processor reset While changing this bit will not increase the theoretical maximum bandwidth it will decrease initial latency of DRAM reads by one clock and increase bandwidth of consecutive page misses When installing less than 16 DIMMs on a memory module there is a preferred order for populating the DIMM sockets to maintain optimal signal integrity When installing two memory modules on the CPU baseboard you should always alternate DIMM installation betwee
246. pace Support Removable Disks Under BIOS as Fixed Disks Display lt Ctrl A gt Message During BIOS Initialization BIOS Support for Bootable CD ROM BIOS Support for Int13 Extensions Advanced Configuration Options Option Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Boot Only All Disks Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Chapter 6 SCSISelect Utility When to Run Comment Enabled lets the host adapter automatically assign SCSI IDs to attached devices supporting the SCAM protocol Enabled lets the host adapter generate a SCSI bus reset the first time the host adapter is initialized Enabled allows SCSI hard disk drives greater than 1 GB to use a translation scheme of 255 heads 63 sectors per track This extends the disk drive capacity limit under DOS to 8 GB No effect if the BIOS is disabled Enabled lets the server boot from a SCSI hard drive connected to the host adapter When enabled the AHA 3940AUW BIOS reserves 32 KB of BIOS space No effect if the BIOS is disabled however 2 KB of memory space is still reserved per PCI and Plug and Play specifications These options let you control which removable media drives the channel BIOS supports No effect if the BIOS is disabled A CAUTION Do not remove media from a removable media drive if itis under channel BIOS control Boot Only Only a removable media drive designated as the boot devi
247. ption When you enter your user password this field automatically changes to set When you enter your administrator password this field automatically changes to set The user password controls access to the system at boot To enter a password press lt Enter gt and follow the screen prompts The administrator password controls access to the setup utility To enter a password press lt Enter gt and follow the screen prompts Requires password entry before boot The system remains in the secure mode until you enter the password Password on Boot takes precedence over Secure Mode Boot Controls access to diskette drives Select the time out period of keyboard or mouse inactivity required before the secure mode activates A password must be entered for the secure mode to work Select a hot key and then press lt Ctrl Alt your hot key to place the system in the secure mode The key should not conflict with any application Available choices are A Z and 0 9 Press lt Del gt to remove the hot key Enabled lets the system boots in the secure mode Requires a password to unlock the system Enabled blanks video when the secure mode activates Requires a password to unlock the system Enabled write protects the diskette drive when the Secure Mode activates Requires a password to restore the diskette writes Enabled disables the front panel controls when the Secure Mode activates Requires a password to unlock the s
248. r te Wartungsarbeiten m ssen von qualifizierten Technikern ausgef hrt werden Versuchen Sie nicht das mitgelieferte Netzkabel zu ndern oder zu verwenden wenn es sich nicht genau um den erforderlichen Typ handelt Ein Produkt mit mehreren Netzger ten hat f r jedes Netzger t ein eigenes Netzkabel Der Wechselstrom des Systems wird durch den Ein Aus Schalter f r Gleichstrom nicht ausgeschaltet Ziehen Sie jedes Wechselstrom Netzkabel aus der Steckdose bzw dem Netzger t um den Stromanschlu des Systems zu unterbrechen SICHERHEISMASSNAHMEN Immer wenn Sie die Geh useabdeckung abnehmen um an das Systeminnere zu gelangen sollten Sie folgende Schritte beachten 1 Schalten Sie alle an Ihr System angeschlossenen Peripherieger te aus 2 Schalten Sie das System mit dem Hauptschalter aus 3 Ziehen Sie den Stromanschlu stecker Ihres Systems aus der Steckdose 4 Auf der R ckseite des Systems beschriften und ziehen Sie alle Anschlu kabel von den I O Anschl ssen oder Ports ab 5 Tragen Sie ein geerdetes Antistatik Gelenkband um elektrostatische Ladungen ESD ber blanke Metallstellen bei der Handhabung der Komponenten zu vermeiden 6 Schalten Sie das System niemals ohne ordnungsgem montiertes Geh use ein Nachdem Sie die oben erw hnten ersten sechs SICHERHEITSSCHRITTE durchgef hrt haben k nnen Sie die Abdeckung abnehmen indem Sie 1 ffnen und entfernen Sie die Verschlu einrichtung Padlock auf der R ckseite
249. r 11 OM06735 Figure 13 1 Boot Hard Disk Drive A Boot hard disk drive E Carrier screw B Drive carrier F Power cable C Carrier tabs G Signal cable D Drive screws four 181 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Mass Storage Devices Four 5 25 inch half height bays provide space for removable media devices such as tape DVD and CD ROM drives Because the top bay contains an IDE CD ROM drive only one other IDE device can be installed on the IDE cable attached to the primary IDE port If needed you can install two more IDE devices in the remaining bays and connect them to the secondary IDE port through a second IDE cable If you do not install more IDE devices in these bays then you can install up to three ultra compliant SCSI devices instead They do not need to operate at the ultra transfer rate If needed you can convert any two adjacent bays to a single full height bay gt NOTE We do not recommend mounting a hard disk drive in a 5 25 inch bay because the drive generates EMI is more susceptible to ESD and may not be adequately cooled Contact your sales representative or dealer for a list of approved add in devices Installing a Mass Storage Device To install devices in the 5 25 inch bays you must remove the plastic filler panels and stainless steel EMI shields that cover the bays See Figures 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 and 13 6 1 2 2 182
250. r Used by Your Server e 281 Part I User s Guide Introduction to the High performance Server On site Installation Installing the Server Power on Self Test Description Running Setup Utility When to Run System Setup Utility When to Run SCSISelect Utility When to Run Emergency Management Port Console How to Use FRU and SDR Load Utility When to Run Hot swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives Installing Hot Swapping O N 9 0 P OQ N 0 Hot swappable Power Supplies Hot Swapping Introduction to the High performance Server The modular scaleable architecture of your high performance server supports symmetrical multiprocessing SMP and a variety of operating systems The server comes with Peripheral Component Interconnect PCI and Industry Standard Architecture ISA buses The server board set consists of seven individual boards e TO baseboard e T O riser card e CPU baseboard e Memory module e Memory terminator module e Front side bus terminator module e Interconnect backplane The I O and CPU baseboards are physically installed back to back on the center bulkhead inside the chassis They are connected to each other by the interconnect backplane NOS DD OM06192 Figure 1 1 High performance Server The easy to integrate server chassis contains a 3 5 inch diskette drive in the 3 5 inch bay a CD ROM drive in the top 5 25 inch bay and depending on the server configuration up to four
251. rd and provides the following external connectors e PS 2 compatible keyboard interchangeable with the mouse e PS 2 compatible mouse interchangeable with the keyboard e parallel port e two serial ports e VGA video port e ICMB connector interface OM08099 Figure 16 1 I O Riser Card UO riser card USB connectors mounted on I O baseboard Parallel port Video port Serial port 2 Serial port 1 Keyboard port Mouse port ICMB connector Ionm o ou gt 213 AD450NX Server System Product Guide UO Baseboard Configuration Jumpers You can use the configuration jumpers on the I O baseboard to recover a BIOS clear a CMOS password or clear all CMOS settings Figure 16 2 shows the jumper positions for the default system configuration The reserved pins may not be populated in shipping configurations Table 16 1 shows the minimum default configurations in bold face type J3H1 10987654321 OOOOOOOOOOJA HRH O1p OOO Q OJC L L J L T T J3H1E J3H1C J3H1A A J3H1D J3H1B OM07157 Figure 16 2 J3H1 Configuration Jumper Block 214 Table 16 1 Configuration Jumpers Pins default in bold Jumper J3H1A J3H1A J3H1A J3H1A J3H1B J3H1B J3H1B J3H1B J
252. rding the Current BIOS Gettngs AAA 217 Creating the BIOS Update Diskette ke 217 Running the BIOS Update Utility ooocononnccccccnonncanonancnononnnnno 218 Recovering the BIOS ee 218 Updating BMC FPC and HSC Firmware kk EEN 219 BOO Ee tities nen es oie es cre eae ee ee Rae eee Ai Ga ae 220 Ley RE EE 221 rege Kee une E 222 Expander Bus Connector Signal Section ENNEN 222 Expander Bus Connector Power Section 225 Connectors J2J1B and J2J1C 33N nennen 225 Connector J2J1D 5 V and I M een 225 Connectors J2J1E J2J1F J2J1G and J2U1H BN 225 Connector J2J1J 332NangdbV een 225 SEENEN uta s 226 64 bit E Ren 227 SACO stato tes Mase oe eae 228 Diskette Drive Porristas 229 Wide Fast Tb SCSI Polls ea erg 230 dl ele na a a ka kann 231 Er ei ee ee ee reset 232 Front Panel GOMNGCIOn et ee en a Oats eee ea eatin 232 Legacy COMMS CLO ataco rs 233 BE e ati oc one 233 Keyboard and Mouse Ports ccoo torta 234 Serial POR EE 234 Faralel POr sao daros ti 235 Ale le nl erte 235 VGA Video POT scudo 236 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 17 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Warnings and Cautions curtir brit la 237 GPU Baseboard Features anche O 237 PROCES SOLS ee A 238 Memory i Ee e 238 DC to DC Voltage Converters AAA 238 DS1624 SEEPBROM ae ee e lee nl 238 Ree lesa les 239 Front Side BUS aia it A AAA 239 Front Side Bus Terminator M dule res ea 239 CPU Baseboard Configur
253. recautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the air baffle as described earlier Remove the two three fan arrays assembly as described earlier Unlock the insert eject mechanical unit by pulling back on the lock unlock lever and while holding the lever in place turn the crank counterclockwise to disengage the interconnect backplane connectors from the connectors on the I O and CPU baseboards Disconnect the signal cable and the three power cables of the interconnect backplane from the power distribution backplane Loosen the two captive screws that attach the mechanical unit to the center bulkhead of the chassis Remove the interconnect backplane and mechanical unit assembly from the chassis and place it on a flat surface Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling OM06720 Figure 12 10 Interconnect Backplane Assembly A Interconnect backplane Captive screws Mechanical unit crank Lock unlock lever Power distribution backplane Cables mm OO D 153 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 8 Orient the assembly so that the crank on the mechanical unit faces toward you 9 Push down on the mechanical unit to disengage the tabs of the unit from the slots in the backplane housing OM07156 Figure 12 11 Detaching the Mechanical Unit Fr
254. require changes please consult your system administrator Information only Information only Information only Information only Information only Information only Information only Information only Information only Information only Additional setup menus to configure the console Select the port address Make sure these values are identical to those of serial ports A and B in the peripheral configuration setup menu continued Server Menu continued Feature Baud Rate Flow Control Processor Retest EMP Password Switch EMP ESC Sequence EMP Hangup Line String Modem Init String EMP Access Mode EMP Restricted Mode Access EMP Direct Connect Modem Mode Option 9600 19 2 K 38 4 K 115 2K No Flow Control CTS RTS XON XOFF CTS RTS CD No Yes Disabled Enabled Preboot Only Always Active Disabled Disabled Enabled Direct Connect Modem Mode Chapter 4 Setup Utility When to Run Description Select the baud rate Select the flow control e CTS RTS Hardware e XON XOFF Software e CTS RTS CD Hardware carrier detect for modem use Yes causes the BIOS to clear historical processor status and retest all processors on the next boot Enable or disable the EMP password The front panel controller firmware updates this field The front panel controller firmware updates this field This string accepts up to 16 characters The upper four characters will go to the ne
255. rking 303 Certifications 304 CFG files 63 Connecting peripheral devices 36 Connectors on CPU baseboard T O power section 225 249 T O signal section 247 248 memory signal sections 243 Connectors on I O baseboard 32 bit PCI 226 64 bit PCI 227 diskette drive port 229 F16 bus 222 front panel 232 PC 232 IDE port 231 ISA 228 legacy 233 USB port 233 wide fast 16 bit SCSI port 230 Connectors on I O riser card keyboard and mouse ports 234 parallel port 235 serial ports 234 video port 236 Connectors on interconnect backplane CPU baseboard signal 268 271 T O baseboard power 275 T O baseboard signal 272 power 268 server management 267 Connectors on memory module signal section 261 321 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Connectors on SCSI backplane 12 V power 202 16 bit input 198 16 bit SCA 200 201 5 V power 202 fan 202 HSC 201 P bay 203 Controller boards AHA 3940AUW SCSI 210 warning 112 Controllers AHA 3940AUW SCSI 210 AIC 7880 SCSI 205 210 board management 212 diskette drive 22 front panel 211 hot swap 212 IDE 210 keyboard mouse 22 video 22 207 Controls and indicators CD ROM drive 24 diskette drive 24 front panel 24 security key lock 24 status LEDs hot docking bays 24 Cooling and airflow 128 minimum clearance 34 Cooling system 21 Covers front bezel reinstalling 132 removing 132 removable 127 side reinstalling 131 removing 130 snap on drive bay
256. rmal trip error Processor 3 thermal trip error Processor 2 failed FRB 3 timer Processor 3 failed FRB 3 timer continued 301 AD450NX Server System Product Guide 302 POST Error Codes and Messages continued Code 8140 8141 8148 8149 814A 8150 8152 8153 8160 8161 8162 8163 8168 8169 816A 816B 8170 8171 8172 8173 8180 8181 8182 8200 8201 8203 8204 Error message Processor 2 disabled Processor 3 disabled Processor 1 failed initialization Processor 2 failed initialization Processor 3 failed initialization NVRAM cleared by jumper ESCD data cleared Password cleared by jumper Unable to apply BIOS update for processor 1 Unable to apply BIOS update for processor 2 Unable to apply BIOS update for processor 3 Unable to apply BIOS update for processor 4 Processor 1 L2 cache failed Processor 2 L2 cache failed Processor 3 L2 cache failed Processor 4 L2 cache failed BIOS does not support current stepping for processor 1 BIOS does not support current stepping for processor 2 BIOS does not support current stepping for processor 3 BIOS does not support current stepping for processor 4 PXB1 failed to respond Mismatch among processors detected L2 cache size mismatch Baseboard management controller failed to function Front panel controller failed to function Primary hot swap controller failed to function Secondary hot swap controller failed to function A Regulatory Specifications The AD450NX server
257. rom the VRM to eject it out of the connector Place the VRM on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper Installing a DC to DC Converter VRM gt NOTE 150 The top VRM connector is rotated 180 from the other five connectors See Figure 12 9 1 2 Remove the DC to DC converter VRM from the antistatic package Carefully insert the VRM in the connector on the CPU baseboard Make sure you do not bend the connector pins Push down firmly on each end of the VRM until the ejector levers of the connector snap into place locking the VRM in the connector Reinstall the air baffle as described earlier Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling O EB OM06719 Figure 12 9 DC to DC Converter VRM A VRM socket B DC to DC Converter VRM C Ejector lever 151 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Interconnect Backplane Assembly The interconnect backplane is attached to an insert eject mechanical unit in the chassis The unit inserts and removes the backplane on and off the I O and CPU baseboard connectors Removing the Interconnect Backplane Assembly 152 See Figure 12 10 1 2 SA Observe the p
258. rror Codes and Messages continued Code 0802 0804 0805 0806 0810 0811 0812 0815 0816 0817 0820 0900 0903 0982 0984 0985 0986 0987 8100 8101 8102 8103 8104 8105 8106 8107 8108 810B 810C 810D 810E 810F 8110 8128 8129 8130 8131 8138 8139 Error message PCI IRQ conflict PCI ROM not found may be OK for this card Insufficient memory to shadow PCI ROM Memory allocation failure for second PCI segment Floppy disk controller resource conflict Primary IDE controller resource conflict Secondary IDE controller resource conflict Parallel port resource conflict Serial port 1 resource conflict Serial port 2 resource conflict Expansion board disabled in slot NVRAM checksum error NVRAM cleared NVRAM data invalid NVRAM cleared I O expansion board NMI in slot Expansion board disabled in slot Fail safe timer NMI System reset caused by watchdog timer Bus time out NMI in slot Processor 0 failed BIST Processor 1 failed BIST Processor 2 failed BIST Processor 3 failed BIST Processor 0 internal error IERR Processor 1 internal error IERR Processor 0 thermal trip error Processor 1 thermal trip error Watchdog timer failed on last boot Processor 0 failed initialization Processor 0 disabled Processor 1 disabled Processor 0 failed FRB 3 timer Processor 1 failed FRB 3 timer Server management interface failed to function Processor 2 internal error IERR Processor 3 internal error IERR Processor 2 the
259. rticelle in sospensione a parte la normale polvere presente nell ambiente e Ben ventilata e lontana da fonti di calore compresa la luce solare diretta e Al riparo da urti e lontana da fonti di vibrazione e Isolata dai forti campi magnetici prodotti da dispositivi elettrici e In aree soggette a temporali consigliabile collegare il sistema ad un limitatore di corrente In caso di temporali scollegare le linee di comunicazione dal modem e Dotata di una presa a muro correttamente installata e Dotata di spazio sufficiente ad accedere ai cavi di alimentazione i quali rappresentano il mezzo principale di scollegamento del sistema 317 AD450NX Server System Product Guide ADVERTENCIAS Espanol 318 El usuario debe abstenerse de manipular los componentes de la fuente de alimentaci n de este producto cuya reparaci n debe dejarse exclusivamente en manos de personal t cnico especializado Puede que este producto disponga de m s de una fuente de alimentaci n No intente modificar ni usar el cable de alimentaci n de corriente alterna si no corresponde exactamente con el tipo requerido El n mero de cables suministrados se corresponden con el n mero de fuentes de alimentaci n de corriente alterna que tenga el producto N tese que el interruptor activado desactivado en el panel frontal no desconecta la corriente alterna del sistema Para desconectarla deber desenc
260. rusdr Is the name of the utility or h Displays usage information d dmi fru sdr Only displays requested area cfg filename cfg Uses custom CFG file p Pause between blocks of data V Verbose display any additional details Parsing the Command Line The FRUSDR Load Utility allows only one command line function at a time A command line function may consist of two parameters for example cfg filename cfg Any invalid parameters result in displaying an error message and exiting the program You can use either a slash or a minus sign to specify command line options The p and v options may be used in conjunction with any of the other options Displaying Usage Information 104 When the utility is run with the or h command line flags the following message is displayed when the verbose flag v is added to the help command FRU amp SDR Load Utility Version 2 0 Usage frusdr Is the name of the utility E hh Displays usage information q Tdmi Eru scdr Only displays requested area cfg filename cfg Uses custom CFG file p Pause between blocks of data y Verbose display any additional details Chapter 8 FRU and SDR Load Utility When to Run Copyright c 1998 Intel Corporation All Rights Reserved This utility must be run from a system executing DOS Running in a Window s DOS box is insufficient and will provide incorrect results Programming the BMC FRU area clears the SDR table therefore t
261. ry PCI slots 64 bit PCI Expansion Slots Five 64 bit PCI bus master slots on a dedicated high performance bus on the I O baseboard provide maximum performance at the wider bus width gt NOTE Both 32 bit and 64 bit PCI boards may be installed in the 64 bit slots However the 32 bit boards will not take advantage of the extra bandwidth provided by the 64 bit bus Add in video boards must be installed in the 32 bit primary PCI slots ISA Expansion Slot The ISA bus master slot on the I O baseboard provides for legacy expansion The ISA slot shares a common chassis I O expansion slot with a 32 bit PCI slot you can use the shared slot for either ISA or PCI but not both The ISA bus operates at up to 8 33 MHz and provides e 24 bit memory addressing e type A transfers at 5 33 MB per second e type B transfers at 8 MB per second e H or 16 bit data transfers e interrupt sharing 206 Chapter 16 I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers PCI Video Controller The onboard Cirrus Logic GD5446 PCI VisualMedia accelerator is a 64 bit DRAM based SVGA controller with hardware accelerated BitBLT transfers of data video playback and video capture to the frame buffer The frame buffer is addressable through a 16 Mbyte window consisting of three 4 Mbyte byte swapping apertures and a special video aperture The SVGA controller also features a 64 bit GUI BitBLT engine with double buffered memory mapped control registers The
262. s A WARNING The push button on off power switch on the front panel of the server does not turn off the AC power To remove AC power from the server you must unplug each AC power cord from each power supply or wall outlet Hazardous voltage current and energy levels are present inside the power distribution backplane There are no user serviceable parts inside it servicing should be done only by technically qualified personnel Removing the Power Distribution Backplane See Figure 12 23 1 2 8 9 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the power supplies as described earlier Disconnect the signal cable and the three power cables of the interconnect backplane from the power backplane Disconnect the signal cable and the two power cables of the SCSI backplane from the power backplane Label and disconnect the signal cable and the two power cables of the redundant power supply bracket from the power backplane Disconnect the daisy chained power cable for the drives in the 5 25 and 3 5 inch drive bays from the power backplane Remove the screws from the power backplane Slide the power backplane toward the SCSI backplane to disengage it from the chassis 10 Remove the power distribution backplane from the chassis and set it aside 174 Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinst
263. s in the top flange of the chassis 2 Insert the plastic latches on the bezel into the holes in the front of the chassis Gently press the bezel onto the chassis until the latches snap in place To prevent damage do not press hard near the light pipe areas 3 Insert the press in rivets through the bezel and into the holes in the chassis Press down firmly on the rivets to properly seat them 4 Reinstall the top and side covers as described earlier in this chapter Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling OM08269 Figure 11 3 Plastic Front Bezel A Tabs B Latches C Press in rivets 133 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Removing the Snap on Drive Bay Cover See Figure 11 4 1 2 Ae Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Using a small flat bladed screwdriver carefully insert it between the latch in the top of the snap on cover and the edge of the front bezel Press down on the latch to unsnap it from the front bezel Carefully insert the screwdriver in the small opening beside the latch While pressing down on the latch use the screwdriver to gently tilt the top of the cover toward you Then tilt the cover slightly to the right so that it clears the door latch on the left Remove the cover from the server and place it on a smooth surface
264. s the most current information about which video drivers you need to install on your server Follow the installation instructions in the README TXT file To install these drivers do this 1 Fully configure your server This can include adding application software an ISA add in board PCI add in boards and the like 2 Insert disk 1 of the video drivers and utilities for MS DOSt and Windows into drive A 3 Atthe DOS command prompt type A install and press lt Enter gt 4 Follow the onscreen directions to install the video drivers Installing SCSI Drivers After copying the SCSI drivers from the Configuration Software CD to diskettes follow the instructions in the README TXT file on the first diskette to install the drivers 43 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Server Won t Boot From the CD It is possible that your server was shipped with the diskette drive or another device set as the first boot device If so the server will try to boot from a diskette or other device rather than from the CD we have provided By pressing lt Esc gt during POST you can override the boot sequence specified in Setup by selecting a different primary boot device This override is valid only for that specific boot Subsequent boots revert back to the sequence specified in Setup If the chosen device fails to load the operating system the BIOS reverts to the previous boot sequence The lt Esc gt hot key is valid while the Press lt F2 gt
265. se records may need to be filtered based on the current product configuration The configuration file directs the filtering of the SDRs Updating the SDR Nonvolatile Storage Area After the utility validates the header area of the supplied SDR file it updates the SDR repository area Before programming the utility clears the SDR repository area The utility filters all tagged SDRs depending on the product configuration set in the configuration file Nontagged SDRs are automatically programmed The utility also copies all written SDRs to the SDR TMP file it contains an image of what was loaded The TMP file is also useful for debugging the server Updating FRU Nonvolatile Storage Area After the configuration is determined the utility updates the FRU nonvolatile storage area First it verifies the Common Header area and checksum from the specified FRU file The Internal Use Area is read out of the specified FRU file and is programmed into the nonvolatile storage The Chassis Area is read out of the specified FRU file Last it reads the Product Area out of the specified FRU file then the area is programmed into the FRU nonvolatile storage All areas are also written to the FRU TMP file 109 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Updating DMI Nonvolatile Storage Area After programming the BMC FRU area the utility then programs the following Chassis Board and Product FRU information to the DMI fields Example Loading DMI System Area
266. seboard so that the fans blow air into the chassis 3 Orient the assembly so that the fans face toward the back of the metal card guide panel the tabs on the back of the metal housing face toward the center bulkhead and the tabs on the front of the metal housing align with the slots in the flanges of the card guide panel 4 Slide the assembly toward the center bulkhead to engage the tabs 5 Insert the screws you removed earlier in the threaded holes in the chassis Tighten the screws firmly 8 0 inch pounds 6 Connect the power cable of the three fans to the SCSI backplane 7 Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 166 Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling OM06729 Figure 12 19 Three fan Array Assembly A Screws B Metal housing C Three fan array and rubber housing 167 AD450NX Server System Product Guide I O Riser Card Removing the I O Riser Card See Figure 12 20 1 2 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Disconnect the Intelligent Chassis Management Bus ICMB signal cable from J1 on the I O riser card Remove and save the screw Holding the card by the top edge or upper corners carefully pull it toward you until the edge connector of the card pulls fr
267. set option that will be in effect after reset The options are EMP active or BIOS redirection The default selection is EMP active e Cancel exits the Connect dialog without taking any action e Help displays the help information for this dialog 99 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Phonebook 100 EMP Console provides a support plug in known as Phonebook It stores names and numbers of servers in a list that can be updated by adding modifying or deleting entries Phonebook can be opened from the main menu and toolbar or launched from the Connect dialog by clicking the Config button Phonebook EN Server y l a Phone No Connect r Operation Cancel New Modify Delete Help Figure 7 6 Phonebook Dialog Options available in the dialog are e Server a dropdown list of server names stored in Phonebook If the New radio button is selected in the Operation area this area is cleared e Phone No the number of the selected server If the New radio button is selected in the Operation area this area is cleared e Operation New lets you add a new entry in the Phonebook Selecting this option clears the Server and Phone No fields You must click Save for the entry to be added to the Phonebook Modify lets you edit an existing entry You must select an existing entry from the Server dropdown list box and modify the existing phone number before selecting this option Click Save in order to upd
268. slated warnings see Appendix C Warnings A 3 Part OEREN O E N A di 3 Part Il Service Technician s Guide 3 E ele E le EE TE NR A O A EE Erg aha 4 Part I User s Guide 1 Introduction to the High performance Server Server Eet a ee ees E 20 CHASSIS ches se EAA A a ee er Re el eh Er ne 23 Controls and Indicators asninn ian a a a a e a nn nano na nc cnn EA ns 24 LS ante a er Renee 26 Front Bezel Key Lock Features ner iria 27 B ck 0f Chassis P dlock nn edi eet E a 28 Alarm SWITCHBS set nn cast case ee ie 29 Password PDrotechon E EEE E EEE 30 Secure Boat Mode ied AE E Eeer 30 lee E e EE 30 Boot Without Keyboard donando 30 Locked Power and Reset Gwitches nan ccnnnanononon 30 Diskette Write Protect get a id 30 Video Blanking este es ek 31 On site Installation Installing the Server Selecting a MO A een 33 Physical SPOCHICANONS sarria ica ara sad ta 34 Environmental Specifications EE 34 After Unpacking the Severin Da ne 34 Moving the Server EE 35 Connecting Peripheral DEVICES ici A cdi 36 Obtaining Power EE E 38 TUI ON de 38 Powerom SCIP Ist nr ae iii 41 Booting From the Server Configuration Software CID 42 Copying Configuration Software to Diskettes esssesenneenneeeennrrrnersstrrnrrrssrrrenrrssrrrrrerrneet 43 Installing Video Drivers cc ans ee uaa ate Seats actus 43 Installing SCSI Drivers sc nase een ts Ae Sai tie Aen ates ER 43 Server Won t Boot From the CD 44 Power on Self Test
269. so describes the error conditions associated with each beep code and the corresponding POST checkpoint CP code as seen by a port 80h card A beep code is a series of individual beeps emitted by the server speaker each equal in length For example if an error occurs at checkpoint 20h a beep code of 1 3 1 1 is generated 1 a single beep 3 burst of three beeps CP Beeps Reason 02 Verify real mode 04 Get processor type 06 Initialize system hardware 08 Initialize chip set registers with initial POST values 09 Set in POST flag 0A Initialize processor registers 0B Enable processor cache DC Initialize caches to initial POST values OE Initialize I O OF Initialize the local bus IDE 10 Initialize Power Management 11 Load alternate registers with initial new POST values 12 Restore processor control word during warm boot 14 Initialize keyboard controller 16 1 2 2 3 BIOS ROM checksum 18 Initialize 8254 timer 1A Initialize 8237 DMA controller 1C Reset Programmable Interrupt Controller 20 1 3 1 1 Test DRAM refresh 22 1 3 1 3 Test 8742 Keyboard Controller 24 Set ES segment register to 4 GB 28 1 3 3 1 Autosize DRAM 2A Clear 512K base RAM 2C 1 3 4 1 RAM failure on address line xxxx 2E 1 3 4 3 RAM failure on data bits xxxx of low byte of memory bus 30 1 4 1 1 RAM failure on data bits xxxx of high byte of memory bus 32 Test processor bus clock frequency 34 Test CMOS 35 RAM initialize alternate chip set registers 36 Warm s
270. so that the tabs face to your right Slide the tabs into the slots in the chassis bulkhead 2 Carefully position the panel so that the slots in the rubber gasket on the inside of the panel fit over the edges of the memory or terminator modules gt NOTE If the memory or terminator modules are slightly warped gently squeeze them together while positioning the support panel 3 Gently push the panel onto the modules until the panel is properly seated 4 Reinstall the screws and tighten them to 8 0 inch pounds 5 Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 142 Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling OM06714 Figure 12 4 Support Panel for Memory Modules A Support panel B Screws C Tabs 143 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Terminator and Memory Modules A CAUTION To avoid damaging the memory module DIMM sockets do not attempt to use the metal stiffener on the memory module as a handle Removing a Memory Module See Figure 12 5 1 2 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the air baffle as described earlier Remove the support panel for the memory modules as described earlier Simultaneously rotate the eject insert levers of the memory module outward about 90 to disengage the pin and socket connector of the
271. sssessssssssnnessserrnrrrnternrrrnrrrssrrrnnresee 192 Power GOOG Achen een a Hin 193 POWBSRON dena ee gege E Ee 193 5 VOQUCKDischarge s o ote ta codices en ee ee 193 15 SCSI Hot docking Backplane Description SCSI IDs Warnings and Cautions uu nk 195 SCSI HOL docking Backplane asien are 195 SCSI ID COMIGUIATIONS re ee are 196 SCSI Hot docking Backplane Connectors AANEREN 197 Wide Fast SCSI Input16 Bit Connectors J1 amp JD 198 Wide Fast SCSI 16 Bit SCA Type Connectors J10 J15 amp J20 J23 oo eee 200 Hot swap Control C nnecler u a are 201 12 V Power CONNCCIOM O 202 5 V Power Connector un ee 202 Fan GOTO CION es een 202 Intrusion Switch CONNOCION 2 nes 203 Contents 16 I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Warnings and Gaulions a ed 205 Input Output I O Baseboard Features Aan 205 S2 Dil PCI EXpansion SO careto 206 64 bit PCI Expansion Slots AANEREN 206 ISA Expansion Slot une es 206 PGI Video Gonlller c see and 207 le TOVI e10 sai atacada dona 207 SS ICOM OM E 210 Adaptec ACTO EE 210 Adaptec AHA 3940AUW nussssnnnnnnsssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 210 DECO ae 210 Server Management SM acia arias doi dudes 211 Leger SE ER aie 213 I O Baseboard Configuration Jumpers ssssssssesssssssstrrsstretrrrnnttstnnrrntnnssrrnnnrsserrnnnneseenennn 214 Restoring CMOS to Default Values nn 216 Clearing the Password unse ea 216 Le ATT the BIOS nai 216 Reco
272. ssword is setup then anyone can access the EMP by clicking OK In the EMP Password area of the Server menu the EMP Password Switch option must be set to enable Then type in a password of up to eight alphanumeric characters If a beep is heard the password was accepted EMP Access Modes Choose either Disabled Pre boot or Always Active depending on the type of EMP access needed The tables above show what is available with a given setting EMP Restricted Mode Access Set Restricted Mode to either enabled or disabled as needed If in enabled mode this means that EMP Console s server control options Power off and Reset are unavailable except power on In disabled mode these same server control options are available EMP Direct Connect Modem Mode Select Direct Connect if a null modem serial cable directly connects the server s COM 2 port to the EMP Console client machine Ifthey are connected via a modem select Modem Mode Console Redirection Submenu The settings in the Console Redirection Submenu of the Server menu must be set exactly as noted to be able to use the EMP COM Port Address Select 2F8 This is the COM 2 port that must be used by the EMP The IRQ setting is automatically populated with the correct number based on the COM Port Address choice Baud Rate Select 19 2k Flow Control Select CTS RTS CD Main EMP Console Window The main EMP Console window provides a graphical user interface GUD to access server
273. sy access to the drives in the bays Carriers for 3 5 inch wide by either 1 or 1 6 inch height drives allow easy hot swapping of drives in and out of these bays without shutting down the server By installing a Redundant Array of Independent Disks RAID controller board on the I O baseboard RAID software and SCSI hard disk drives in the hot docking bays you can easily set up RAID applications Tools and Supplies You Need e Phillips cross head screwdriver 2 bit e Antistatic wrist strap recommended e Penor pencil Equipment Log Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B Equipment Log to record the model and serial numbers of the server all installed options and any other pertinent information about the server You will need this information when running the SSU 111 AD450NX Server System Product Guide SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drives The server supports a variety of single ended SCSI SCA type hard disk drives As shipped from the supplier the server may not contain any drives Contact your sales representative or dealer for a list of approved drives that can be installed in the server A WARNING The single ended SCSI hot docking backplane requires installing single ended SCSI controller boards and devices in your server Installing differential SCSI device types can result in electrical damage to the controller boards and the drives Mounting a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive in a Carrier See Figures 9 1 and
274. t Enter gt to view the Configuration Menu Press lt Enter gt to view the SCSI Disk Utilities Menu Configuration Menu Feature SCSI Bus Interface Definitions Host Adapter SCSI ID SCSI Parity Checking Host Adapter SCSI Termination Additional Options Boot Device Options SCSI Device Configuration Advanced Configuration Options Option 0 7 15 Enabled Disabled Automatic Low On High On Low Off High Off Low Off High On Press lt Enter gt Press lt Enter gt Press lt Enter gt Boot Device Configuration Menu Feature Option Boot Channel A First B First Boot SCSI ID 0 15 Boot LUN Number 0 7 Comment Chapter 6 SCSISelect Utility When to Run Comment Use this option to change the SCSI ID of the host adapter channel Each device on the SCSI bus including the channel must have a unique ID The ID defines the device and the priority of the ID determines which device controls the bus when two or more devices try to use it simultaneously Each adapter on the bus whether 8 or 16 bit has a default ID of 7 the highest priority on the bus When enabled the channel always checks parity when reading from the SCSI bus to verify the correct transmission of data from the SCSI devices Select disabled if any attached devices do not support SCSI parity When Automatic the host adapter automatically enables or disables termination Low On High On enables termination for both low and high bytes of
275. t coprocessor if present continued 297 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Port 80h Codes continued CP Beeps Reason 80 Detect and install external RS232 ports 82 Detect and install external parallel ports 85 Initialize PC compatible PnP ISA devices 86 Reinitialize onboard I O ports 88 Initialize BIOS Data Area 8A Initialize Extended BIOS Data Area 8C Initialize floppy controller 90 Initialize hard disk controller 91 Initialize local bus hard disk controller 92 Jump to UserPatch2 93 Build MPTABLE for multiprocessor boards 94 Disable A20 address line 95 Install CD ROM for boot 96 Clear huge ES segment register 98 1 2 Search for option ROMs one long beep and two short beeps on checksum failure 9A Shadow option ROMs 9C Set up Power Management 9E Enable hardware interrupts AO Set time of day A2 Check key lock A4 Initialize typematic rate A8 Erase F2 prompt AA Scan for F2 key stroke AC Enter SETUP AE Clear in POST flag BO Check for errors B2 POST done prepare to boot operating system B4 1 One short beep before boot B5 Display MultiBoot menu B6 Check password optional B8 Clear global descriptor table BC Clear parity checkers BE Clear screen optional BF Check virus and backup reminders co Try to boot with INT 19 DO Interrupt handler error D2 Unknown interrupt error D4 Pending interrupt error continued 298 Chapter 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages Port 80h
276. t sense lines via the private DC bus Fourth Power Supply Cable Good Detection 192 The fourth power supply connects to the power distribution backplane through two power cables and one signal cable If the server is powered up while missing one of these three cables the other cables backplane or power supply could be damaged The cable good detect circuit prevents the fourth power supply from powering up if all three of its cables are not correctly connected The cable detect signal is daisy chained through the cables of the fourth power supply any cable missing breaks the chain and prevents the fourth power supply from powering up Chapter 14 Power Distribution Backplane Description Voltages Power Good If the power good signal for a power supply is asserted high it signifies that all voltages are available and stable The power good signals from all supplies are Ored to create system power good Power On When the power on signal is asserted from the front panel the power supplies power up if there is no 240 VA shutdown condition The fourth supply powers up only if all three cables are detected 5 V Quick Discharge The quick discharge circuit fully discharges the 5 V bus after power down The circuit starts discharging the bus until the voltage droops to around 1 V 193 15 SCSI Hot docking Backplane Description SCSI IDs This chapter describes the SCSI hot docking backplane and lists the SCSI IDs Warnings and Cauti
277. t the CD into your CD ROM drive and press the reset switch on the front panel or lt Ctrl Alt Del gt to reboot the server When prompted press lt F2 gt to enter BIOS Setup From the Boot Menu select the Boot Device Priority option and then select the CD ROM drive as your primary boot device Press lt F10 gt to save the new settings Press lt Enter gt to exit BIOS Setup and boot from the CD From the CD menu select Run Utilities and press lt Enter gt Select Run System Setup Utility and press lt Enter gt Follow the screen prompts If you boot from the CD skip to step 4 3 The mouse driver loads if it is available press lt Enter gt to continue 4 When the main window of the SSU appears you can customize the user interface before continuing 65 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Customizing the SSU The SSU lets you customize the user interface according to your preferences The AF sets these preferences and saves them in the AF INI file so that they take effect the next time you start the SSU There are four user customizable settings NOTE If you run the SSU from nonwritable media like a CD these preferences will be lost when you exit the SSU e Color this button lets you change the default colors associated with different items on the screen with predefined color combinations The color changes are instantaneous e Mode this button lets you set the desired expertise level novice intermediat
278. tal Specifications Temperature Nonoperating Operating Humidity Operating wet bulb Nonoperating Operating Shock Nonoperating Operating Altitude Nonoperating Operating Acoustic noise Electrostatic discharge ESD AC Input Power 100 120 V 200 240 V 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F 5 to 35 C 41 to 95 F derated 0 5 C for every 1000 ft 305 m Not to exceed 33 C 91 4 F with diskette drive or hard disk drive 95 relative humidity noncondensing at 55 C 131 F 85 relative humidity noncondensing at 35 C 95 F 20 g 11 msec 1 2 sine 2 0 g 11 msec 1 2 sine To 50 000 ft 15 240 m To 10 000 ft 3 048 m Typically lt 50 dBA at 28 C 82 F with four internal hard disk drives measured at 1 meter from the front of the server with the peripherals idle The noise of the variable speed power supply fans will increase with temperature and power load Your selection of peripherals may change the noise level Tested to 20 kilovolts kV no component damage CD ROM drive tested to 15 kV manufacturer s specification Single power supply fully loaded 100 120 V 7 0 A 50 60 Hz 200 240 V 3 5 A 50 60 Hz After Unpacking the Server 34 Inspect the shipping box for evidence of mishandling during transit If the shipping box is damaged photograph it for reference After removing the contents keep the damaged box and the packing materials If the contents appear damaged
279. tart shutdown continued 296 Port 80h Codes continued CP 37 38 39 3A 3C 3D 40 42 44 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4E 50 52 54 56 58 5A 5C 60 62 64 66 68 6A 6C 6E 70 72 74 76 7A 7C 7E Beeps 2 1 2 3 2 2 3 1 Chapter 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages Reason Reinitialize the chip set MB only Shadow system BIOS ROM Reinitialize the cache MB only Autosize cache Configure advanced chip set registers Load alternate registers with new CMOS values Set initial new processor speed Initialize interrupt vectors Initialize BIOS interrupts Check ROM copyright notice Initialize manager for PCI Option ROMs Check video configuration against CMOS Initialize PCI bus and devices Initialize all video adapters in system Display QuietBoot screen Shadow video BIOS ROM Display copyright notice Display processor type and speed Test keyboard Set key click if enabled Enable keyboard Test for unexpected interrupts Display prompt Press F2 to enter SETUP Test RAM between 512 and 640k Test extended memory Test extended memory address lines Jump to UserPatch1 Configure advanced cache registers Enable external and processor caches Display external cache size Display shadow message Display nondisposable segments Display error messages Check for configuration errors Test real time clock Check for keyboard errors Test for key lock on Set up hardware interrupt vectors Tes
280. the bay until the slide rails lock in place Connect the power signal cables to the drive Reinstall the snap on plastic drive bay cover as described in Chapter 11 Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 This step is optional Run the SSU or Setup to specify that the IDE CD ROM drive is the boot device For information about running these utilities see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run and Chapter 4 Setup Utility When to Run 14 Power Distribution Backplane Description Voltages This chapter describes the power distribution backplane Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 125 Power Distribution Backplane The power backplane distributes the power load of the server among three or four 420 watt autoranging power supplies It serves as an interface between the individual power supplies the interconnect backplane and the WideUltra SCSI hot docking backplane The power backplane distributes the following voltages and maximum currents These are the backplane limits not the power supply Voltage Destination Maximum Current 12 V Interconnect backplane 33 A 5 V Interconnect backplane 60 A 3 3 V Interconnect backplane 42 A 5 V standby Interconnect backplane 360 mA 12 V Interconnect backplane 2A 12
281. the chassis 5 Attach the cover to the chassis with the three screws and tighten them firmly 6 0 inch pounds 6 Connect all external cables and power cords to the server gt NOTE To plug in a power cord push and hold the spring loaded safety interlock mechanism toward the edge of the power supply Then plug the power cord into the exposed inlet receptacle and release the safety interlock 7 For security and to prevent unauthorized entry into the server lock the padlock on the back of the server chassis 131 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Removing the Plastic Front Bezel The plastic front bezel is attached to the chassis with four press in rivets and six plastic latches See Figure 11 3 1 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines 2 Remove the top and side covers as described earlier in this chapter 3 Using a flat bladed screwdriver extract the press in rivets and set them aside 4 Unsnap the plastic latches and push them through the slots in the chassis 5 Pull up on the top of the bezel to disengage the four plastic tabs along the top of it from the notches in the top flange of the chassis 6 Remove the the bezel from the chassis and place it on a smooth surface so that it does not get scratched Reinstalling the Plastic Front Bezel 132 See Figure 11 3 1 Position the front bezel in front of the chassis and insert the plastic tabs along the top of the bezel in the notche
282. the chassis with the screws removed earlier and tighten them firmly 4 Insert and lock the padlock to the system to prevent unauthorized access inside the system 5 Connect all external cables and the AC power cord s to the system continued Appendix C Warnings WARNING English continued A microprocessor and heat sink may be hot if the system has been running Also there may be sharp pins and edges on some board and chassis parts Contact should be made with care Consider wearing protective gloves Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the equipment manufacturer Discard used batteries ac cording to manufacturer s instructions The system is designed to operate in a typical office environment Choose a site that is e Clean and free of airborne particles other than normal room dust e Well ventilated and away from sources of heat including direct sunlight e Away from sources of vibration or physical shock e isolated from strong electromagnetic fields produced by electrical devices e In regions that are susceptible to electrical storms we recommend you plug your system into a surge suppresser and disconnect telecommunication lines to your modem during an electrical storm e Provided with a properly grounded wall outlet e Provided with sufficient space to access the power supply cords because they serve as
283. the hard disk drive installed at this connection Auto autotypes the hard disk drive installed here 1 39 lets you select the predetermined hard disk drive installed here CD ROM a CD ROM is installed here ATAPI Removable removable disk drive installed here Enabled allows 32 bit IDE data transfers Press lt Enter gt for options Pressing lt Enter gt attempts to detect the drive type for drives that comply with ANSI specifications User lets you enter the parameters of the hard disk drive installed at this connection Auto autotypes the hard disk drive installed here 1 39 lets you select the predetermined hard disk drive installed here CD ROM a CD ROM is installed here ATAPI Removable removable disk drive installed here Enabled allows 32 bit IDE data transfers Press lt Enter gt for options Pressing lt Enter gt attempts to detect the drive type for drives that comply with ANSI specifications User lets you enter the parameters of the hard disk drive installed at this connection Auto autotypes the hard disk drive installed here 1 39 lets you select the predetermined hard disk drive installed here CD ROM a CD ROM is installed here ATAPI Removable removable disk drive installed here Enabled allows 32 bit IDE data transfers Displays information about all processors You cannot modify any items in this menu Consult your system administrator if an item requires changing
284. tion Setting Configuration Jumpers I O Baseboard Layout OM06758 Figure 16 3 I O Baseboard Layout Interconnect backplane connector expander bus J3H1 jumper block A Primary IDE port B Wide SCSI port C Secondary IDE port D Diskette drive port E Front panel connector F 1 O riser card G 16 bit ISA expansion slot H 32 bit PCI expansion slots 64 bit PCI expansion slots J Reserved K Battery L M 221 AD450NX Server System Product Guide I O Baseboard Connectors Expander Bus Connector Signal Section 222 Signal IO_TCK IO_TDO BMC_SPI_BUS 1 BMC_SPI_BUS 6 BMC_SPI_BUS 0 12C_BMC_SCL 12C_BMC_SDA NMI_5V GND ISP_SDO INTRUSION_L ISP_SDI VCC_STDBY 12C_FPC_SCL 12C_FPC_SDA GND X1D_L 0 Pin A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 A35 Signal GND Ground GND IO_TDI GND CPU_SPI_RESET_L GND BMC_SPI_BUS 3 GND IGNNE_L GND XOXRTS_L GND XOD_L 2 GND X0D_L 5 GND XOD_L 7 GND XOD_L 10 GND X0D_L 13 GND GND ISP_SCLK GND GND GND VCC_STDBY GND 12C_DS2P_SDA GND Pin B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21
285. tion about the server You will need this information when running the SSU 137 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Jig saw Foam Air Baffle The air baffle concentrates air flow over the components and modules on the CPU baseboard Removing the Jig saw Foam Air Baffle See Figure 12 1 1 Ze Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Grasp the front and back sections of the baffle Remove the baffle from the chassis and set it aside Reinstalling the Jig saw Foam Air Baffle See Figure 12 1 1 2 3 4 Si 138 Connect the front and back sections of the baffle together if they fell apart on removal Grasp the front and back sections of the baffle to keep it from coming apart Position the baffle over the CPU baseboard Insert the baffle into the chassis back in first and gently push it into place Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Server Components Removing Reinstalling OM06712 Figure 12 1 Jig saw Foam Air Baffle A Back section of the air baffle B Front section of the air baffle 139 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Two Three fan Array Assemblies The two three fan array assemblies provide cooling for the CPU baseboard side of the server The assemblies consists of two ru
286. trying to initiate the new connection You are prompted to enter the EMP password whenever a connection is attempted Line selection Serial line Dial up 8 Bit No parity 1 stop bit Direct connect Serial Line Config Baud Rate Dial up Cancel Server Coros COM Port No Ei Help Figure 7 3 Connect Dialog Options available in the dialog are e Line Selection you can specify whether to use a direct connection or dial up modem connection to the server Dial up connects to a selected server with a modem Direct connect Serial Line connects to the selected server directly using a null modem serial cable 97 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Server a server name can be selected from the dropdown list of available servers A server must be selected when the line selection is Dial up Serial Line These options are enabled when the line selection is set to Direct connect Serial Line Baud Rate must be 19200 for EMP to connect properly COM Port No set the COM Port number to the port which the null modem serial cable is connected to Connect initiates the connection to the connected server When this button is clicked you are prompted for the EMP password Config displays the Phonebook dialog Cancel exits the Connect dialog without taking any action Help displays the help information for this dialog Power On Off Selectin
287. unused slot 2 connector When installing processors always install them in sequence by starting with processor connector 1 then connector 2 and so on bottom connector to top connector For example in a dual processor server connectors 1 and 2 contain processors while connectors 3 and 4 contain terminator modules Front Side Bus Terminator Module The FSB terminator module provides e the necessary termination for the AGTL signals on the FSB e correct handling of JTAG scan signals 239 AD450NX Server System Product Guide CPU Baseboard Configuration Jumpers The J31 jumper block e controls the VRMs and server management outputs e determines core to bus ratio e provides parking spaces for unused jumpers O O x o S e A O O 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 CR Bl OOOO O 135 79111315 OM06759 Figure 17 1 J31 Jumper Block Table 17 1 J31 Jumpers for VRMs and Server Management Pins 1 and 2 Pins 3 and 4 Status 1 1 Disable VRMs 1 0 Reserved 0 1 Disable Server Management 0 0 Default Normal Operation Key 0 open 1 closed 240 Chapter 17 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Installing jumpers across pins 5 and 6 7 and 8 and 9 and 10 determines the processor core to FSB fr
288. ur poignet et reliez la a la masse du syst me toute surface m tallique non peinte du boitier 6 Ne faites pas fonctionner le syst me tandis que le bo tier est ouvert Une fois TOUTES les tapes pr c dentes accomplies vous pouvez retirer les panneaux du systeme Proc dez comme suit 1 Si un cadenas a t install sur a l arri re du systeme d verrouillez le et retirez le 2 Retirez toutes les vis des panneaux et mettez les dans un endroit s r 3 Retirez les panneaux Afin de permettre le refroidissement et l a ration du systeme r installez toujours les panneaux du boitier avant de mettre le systeme sous tension Le fonctionnement du systeme en l absence des panneaux risque d endommager ses pi ces Pour installer les panneaux proc dez comme suit 1 Assurez vous de ne pas avoir oubli d outils ou de pieces d mont es dans le systeme 2 Assurez vous que les cables les cartes d extension et les autres composants sont bien install s 3 Revissez solidement les panneaux du boitier avec les vis retir es plus t t 4 Remettez le cadenas en place et verrouillez le afin de pr venir tout acc s non autoris a l int rieur du systeme 5 Rebranchez tous les cordons d alimentation c a et cables externes au syst me suite Appendix C Warnings AVERTISSEMENT Francais suite Le microprocesseur et le dissipateur de chaleur peuvent tre chauds si le syst me a t sous tension Faites galement
289. ure 18 4 4 1 Interleave With 16 DIMMs A Bank A J1 J4 populated C Bank J9 J12 populated B Bank B J5 J8 populated D Bank D J13 J16 populated 255 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Memory Module Layout OM06765 Figure 18 5 Memory Module Layout J1 J4 168 pin DIMM sockets Bank A J5 J8 168 pin DIMM sockets Bank B J9 J12 168 pin DIMM sockets Bank C J13 J16 168 pin DIMM sockets Bank D U9D1 DS1624 DC EEPROM and temperature sensor package J21 memory interface connector Eject insert levers oaonmoou gt Installing DIMMs CAUTION 256 DIMM devices with gold contacts should not be installed in DIMM sockets with tin lead contacts or vice versa Mixing dissimilar metal contacts types has been shown to result in unreliable memory operation To avoid potential memory problems use only DIMMs from JEDEC compatible manufacturers that have been tested for compatibility with the memory module Contact your sales representative or dealer for a list of approved DIMMs See Figures 18 6 and 18 7 1 2 Observe the precautions on page 125 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 11 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling
290. ware and it complies with the ISA Plug and Play specifications The SSU works with any compliant configuration CFG file supplied by the peripheral device manufacturer The I O baseboard comes with a CFG file The CFG file describes the characteristics of the board and the system resources that it requires The configuration registers on PCI and ISA Plug and Play add in boards contain the same type of information that is in a CFG file Some ISA boards also come with a CFG file The SSU uses the information provided by CFG files configuration registers flash memory and the information that you enter to specify a system configuration The SSU writes the configuration information to flash memory The SSU stores configuration values in flash memory These values take effect when you boot the server POST checks the values against the actual hardware configuration if they do not agree POST generates an error message You must then run the SSU to specify the correct configuration before the server boots The SSU always includes a checksum with the configuration data so that the BIOS can detect any potential data corruption before the actual hardware configuration takes place 63 AD450NX Server System Product Guide What You Need to Do The SSU may be run directly from the Server Configuration Software CD or from a set of DOS diskettes If you choose to run the SSU from a set diskettes you must copy the SSU from the Server Configurati
291. wer supplies 22 Chapter 1 Introduction to the High performance Server Chassis Figures 1 2 and 1 3 show the major components of the server A A B ya ere c Ca D FI U E F H ES M p G 4 C D G E E F OM06706 CPU baseboard and processors Two three fan arrays Memory modules 3 5 inch SCSI hot docking bays SCSI hot docking backplane Power distribution backplane Power supplies Expansion slots I O panel Figure 1 2 Server Back Left Side View CTA Se OT CO mm oo wD gt OM06707 Figure 1 3 Server Back Right Side View 3 5 inch boot drive bay Interconnect backplane I O baseboard I O panel Expansion slots Power supplies Power distribution backplane SCSI hot docking backplane 3 5 inch SCSI hot docking bays 3 5 inch diskette drive Three fan array 5 25 inch half height bays 23 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Controls and Indicators 24 See Figure 1 4 on page 25 Item Feature Front Panel A Front panel LCD B NMI switch C Power LED green D Power fault LED yellow E Cooling fault LED yellow F Drive fault LED yellow G Power switch H Reset switch CD ROM Drive Headphone jack J Volume control K Activity LED L Open close button Security Key Lock Description It displays information about processor type and failure codes
292. wtches kuke 40 2 5 ID RO MIDI IV eieae aa ee et 42 2 6 Boot ET a aa ee 44 22 ee E tel AR Boot Menu zn denen aan al 44 5 1 System Setup Utility Main Window u 2s4ssssnennnnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 67 5 2 REAWINdeWE ee eege 69 Day DSTA ISA WINDOW an een een 70 5 4 Configuration ele e EE 72 5 5 System Resource Usage Window se eee adetetline 73 5 6 Multiboot Main VEER eegene deed 75 5 7 Password Main Window 77 5 8 System Event Log Main Window coria 79 7 1 EMP Console in Command Gtate een 92 7 2 EMP Console in Redirect State nn 93 1 5 Connect ET e WE 97 7 4 Power On Off DidlOG sc xtc cetn tint ne tetera nan leeren 98 7 6 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 10 1 10 2 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 12 8 12 9 12 10 12 11 12 12 12 13 12 14 12 15 12 16 12 17 12 18 12 19 12 20 12 21 12 22 12 23 12 24 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 13 8 13 9 15 1 15 2 Contents Reset Dial esc ee e a a 99 Phonebook Dialog E 100 Hard Disk Drive and C rrier rennen 113 Hard Disk Drive and Carrier Aesembhy uk 113 Installing a Hard Disk Drive degt EEN 114 Front Bezel SSCuUriTy KEY LOCK a u een 115 Hot swapping a Hard Disk Diva ee een tnne 117 Removing a Power Supply ernennen en 121 Removing Replacing a Power Gupphy ke 122 A ef ee teh N Ne Aen ne 129 o 130 SE Ee 133 Snap on Plastic Dr
293. xt field which will pop up as soon as the 16th character is filled Trying to fill the 17th character in the same field will have a wraparound problem Preboot Only EMP enabled during power down or POST Always Active EMP always enabled Disabled EMP disabled When enabled power down front panel NMI and reset control via EMP are disabled Restricted mode can be selected with preboot or always active You can connect directly to the port or use amodem 59 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Boot Menu 60 Feature Diskette Check Boot Device Priority Hard Drive Removable Devices Maximum Number of 120 Drives Message Timeout Multiplier Pause During Post Option Disabled Enabled Diskette Drive 2 Removable Devices 3 Hard Drive 4 ATAPI CD ROM Drive Disabled Enabled Description Enabled verifies the diskette type on boot Disabled speeds up the boot process Select the search order for the types of boot devices Use the up and down arrow keys to select a device Press lt gt to move it up the list and press lt gt to move it down the list Press lt Esc gt to exit this menu The system attempts to boot to the OS from the first hard drive in this list If it does not find an OS the system tries the next drive listed until if finds an OS Use the up and down arrow keys to select a device Press lt gt to move it up the list and press lt gt to move it down the l
294. y international notices 304 USA notice 304 Retaining bracket for add in boards reinstalling 160 removing 160 RFI 20 S SCI files 63 SCSI boot hard disk drive 180 controller 22 325 AD450NX Server System Product Guide SCSI continued hard disk drive 112 hot swapping 116 indicator drive in recovery mode 116 installing in hot docking bay 114 status indicator LED locations 117 status indicators 116 hot docking backplane 22 195 hard disk drives 195 ID addresses 196 indicator LEDs 195 power control 196 reinstalling 172 removing 172 temperature sensor 195 hot docking backplane connectors 12 V power 202 16 bit input 198 16 bit SCA 200 201 5 V power 202 fan 202 HSC 201 P bay 203 hot docking bays 111 ID addresses 182 installing drivers 43 SCSISelect utility 81 boot target ID 83 87 logical unit number LUN 83 87 singled ended devices 112 Security 26 alarm switches 26 boot sequence control 30 boot without keyboard 30 diskette write protect 30 front bezel key lock 24 key locks and alarm switches 26 locked power and reset switches 30 password protection 30 secure boot mode 30 setup utility 26 system setup utility SSU 26 video blanking 31 Selecting a site 33 Self certification information 304 Server after unpacking 34 back panel 37 board set 19 boot from CD 42 chassis 20 cooling and airflow 128 copy software to diskettes 43
295. y Lock A Not used B Locked position C Unlocked position Close the lower front doors of the server For security and to prevent unauthorized entry into the bays lock the doors by turning the key to position B Remove the key and store it in a safe place If you installed a RAID controller board in your server run the Disk Array Controller Configuration utility supplied with the board See the manufacture s documentation provided with the board 115 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Hot swapping a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive Status LEDs arranged in sets of three above each of the 12 hot docking bays monitor the status of each drive When a yellow LED is on continuously it is okay to hot swap remove and replace a bad drive with a good one You do not need to shut the server down to hot swap a drive SCSI Drive Status LED Descriptions SCSI drive present SCSI drive SCSI drive power on active faulty green LED A green LED B yellow LED C Description and action if needed O O Drive is present with power On Off Off O Drive is present with power and is being accessed On Blinking Off O O Drive CAN be replaced Steady yellow fault light Off Off On indicates drive has a problem Power to drive is off O Drive SHOULD NOT be replaced at this time A On Off Slow blinking slowly blinking yellow fault light indicates that a drive that has just been replaced is in recovery mode drive array being re
296. you receive any error messages refer to Error Codes and Messages on page 295 for an explanation and suggestions 289 AD450NX Server System Product Guide More Troubleshooting Procedures This section provides a more detailed approach to identifying a problem and locating its source Preparing the Server for Diagnostic Testing CAUTION Before disconnecting any peripheral cables from the server turn off the server and any external peripheral devices Failure to do so can cause permanent damage to the server and or the peripheral devices Turn off the server and all external peripheral devices Disconnect all devices from the server except the keyboard and video monitor Make sure the server power cords are plugged into properly grounded AC outlets Chapter 2 Make sure your video monitor and keyboard are correctly connected to the server Turn on the monitor Set its brightness and contrast controls to at least two thirds of their maximum ranges refer to the documentation supplied with your monitor If the operating system normally loads from the hard disk drive make sure there is no diskette in drive A Ifthe OS normally loads from a diskette place the diskette containing the OS files in drive A Turn on the server Ifthe power LED does not light refer to Power Light Does Not Light on page 291 Monitoring POST See Chapter 3 Verifying Proper Operation of the Server Lights As POST determines the server configuratio
297. ystem 57 AD450NX Server System Product Guide Server Menu Feature System Management Firmware SMIs System Event Logging Clear Event Log Assert NMI on AERR Assert NMI on BERR Assert NMI on PERR Assert NMI on SERR Enable Host Bus Error Server Management Information Board Part Number Board Serial Number System Part Number System Serial Number Chassis Part Number Chassis Serial Number BMC Revision FPC Revision Primary HSBP Revision Secondary HSBP Revision Console Redirection COM Port Address IRQ 58 Option Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled 3F8 2F8 3E8 None Description An additional setup menu for changing server management features Disabled turns off all firmware SMI sources Enabled logs critical system events Enabled cleans the system event log Enabled generates an NMI Enabling the Firmware SMls option is required to assert an NMI Enabled generates an NMI Enabling the Firmware SMls option is required to assert an NMI Enabled generates an NMI Enabling the SERR option is required to activate this option Enabled generates an NMI Enables host single and multi bit errors Displays system serial number part number and server management controller revisions All items on this menu cannot be modified in user mode If any items

Intel Server Platform AD450NX (ASDKCHSYS)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents